1. business and industrial
2. construction

Project Manual
Building 1100 Café
Project No: 213127
Guernsey/Tingle Architects
4350 New Town Avenue, Suite 101
Williamsburg, Virginia 23188
Bid Documents
June 23, 2014
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
Table of Contents
Division 01
General Requirements
01 10 00
01 10 01
01 10 05
01 10 40
01 20 30
01 20 50
01 20 90
01 30 10
01 30 20
01 30 30
01 40 00
01 40 20
01 50 00
01 50 60
01 60 00
01 70 00
01 70 70
01 70 81
Summary
General Conditions
Site & Construction Security
Work Restrictions
Alternates
Contract Modifications
Payment Procedures
Project Management & Coordination
Construction Progress Documentation
Submittal Procedures
Quality Requirements
References
Temporary Facilities and Controls
Environmental General Requirements
Product Requirements
Execution Requirements
Closeout Procedures
Project Record Documents
Division 02
Existing Conditions
02 41 00
Demolition
Division 03
Concrete
03 10 00
03 20 00
03 30 00
03 39 00
Concrete Forming and Accessories
Concrete Reinforcing
Cast in Place Concrete
Concrete Curing
Division 04
Masonry
04 20 01
Masonry Veneer
Division 05
Metals
Division 07
Thermal and Moisture Protection
07 21 00
07 90 05
Thermal Insulation
Joint Sealers
Division 08
Openings
08 11 13
08 14 16
08 71 00
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Flush Wood Doors
Door Hardware
Division 09
Finishes
09 21 16
09 30 00
Gypsum Board Assemblies
Tiling
June 23, 2014
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Building 1100 Café
09 51 00
09 65 00
09 77 33
09 90 00
Suspended Ceilings
Resilient Flooring
Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Panels
Painting and Coating
Division 11
Equipment
11 40 00
11 40 00.01
Foodservice Equipment
Food Service Equipment Schedule
Division 12
Furnishings
12 24 00
Window Shades
Division 21
Fire Suppression
21 00 00
FIRE SUPPRESSION
Division 22
Plumbing
22 00 00
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Division 23
Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
23 05 00
23 05 29
23 07 00
23 23 00
23 31 13
23 33 00
23 37 13
23 81 26
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
HVAC INSULATION
REFRIGERANT PIPING
METAL DUCTS
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
REGISTERS AND GRILLES
SPLIT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
Division 26
Electrical
26 05 00
26 05 26
26 05 33
26 24 16
26 27 26
26 41 00
26 51 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PANELBOARDS
WIRING DEVICES
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Division 28
Electronic Safety and Security
28 31 00
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
June 23, 2014
2
Bid Documents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Project Identification: construction to include demolition and removal of existing temporary living
quarters and construction of new multifamily living quarters with all appropriate site and utility work.
1.
Project Location:
Armed Forces Experimental Training Activity, Camp Peary
1100 Executive Drive, Williamsburg, VA 23188
2.
Owner: The terms Owner and Government refer to Armed Forces Experimental Training Activity,
Camp Peary
B.
Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated _, were prepared for Project by Guernsey
Tingle Architects, 3200 Ironbound Road, Williamsburg VA 23188
C.
The terms Owner’s Representative, Government Representative, and Contracting Officer’s Technical
Representative (COTR) refer to the following:
To be determined (757) 229 2121.
D.
Base Bid: The work consists of: selective demolition of existing cyber café and construction of a new
food service café within Building 1100, and all related site and utility work described in the construction
documents.
E.
The Work includes Architectural, Civil, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical work.
1.
Any work shown on the contract drawings or in the contract specifications but not listed below
does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility to include all materials for complete systems
in his bid price. It is the contractor’s responsibility to review contract drawings and specifications
in their entirety prior to submitting a bid. If any discrepancies exist, it is the contractor’s
responsibility to notify the engineer and owner in writing prior to submitting bid. No exceptions
will be allowed.
2.
All work listed includes Base Bid and Alternates.
3.
Work below is not a complete listing. For a more complete description of description and new
work, refer to Contract Drawings.
4.
Civil: Site development including earthwork, paving and utilities improvements.
5.
Environmental: Includes all necessary permits and erosion and sedimentation control measures,
asbestos remediation and lead base paint disposal.
June 23, 2014
01 10 00 1
SUMMARY
Building 1100 Café
1.3
Bid Documents
6.
Architectural: Construction of a new food service cafe, including related structural, mechanical,
plumbing, fire protection, kitchen equipment, and electrical work.
7.
Work consists of providing labor, materials, equipment, services and administration required in
conjunction with or properly incidental to construction of Project.
8.
Consideration will not be granted for misunderstanding of amount of work to be performed. Work
includes all items and conditions specified, indicated on the Drawings, Specifications, or required
by nature of the building site. Any questions relating to the scope of work shall be submitted to
the contracting officer for resolution Prior to Bid. Government will not entertain change order due
to contractor not understanding extend of work required. It is the contractor’s responsibility to
thoroughly review the contents of the contract specifications Prior to Bid.
CONTRACT
A.
1.4
Project will be constructed under a general construction contract.
USE OF PREMISES
A.
General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations and shall be confined to
the “Limit of Work” indicated on the construction drawings. The Contractor shall have additional limited
use of staging areas outside of the “Limit of Work” as directed by the Government’s Representative.
The Contractor's use of premises is limited by the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.5
Government’s right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
Construction security procedures in the contract.
The Government’s ongoing access and use of the occupied buildings adjacent to the limits of
construction.
Refer to Section 01 14 00
premises.
"Work Restrictions" for additional limitations on the Contractor's use of
WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A.
Separate Contract: The Government may award separate contracts for performance of certain
construction operations at Project site. The Government will also perform work at the site with its own
forces. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. Work under
other contracts may include the following:
1.
Installation of natural gas.
B.
Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly,
without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.
1.6
SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A.
Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16
division format and CSI/CSC's "Master Format" numbering system.
1.
June 23, 2014
Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross
referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence;
however, the sequence is incomplete.
01 10 00 2
SUMMARY
Building 1100 Café
B.
Bid Documents
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the
intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These
conventions are as follows:
1.
Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is
abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not
stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and
plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract
Documents indicates.
2.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to
describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.
a.
The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 10 00
June 23, 2014
01 10 00 3
SUMMARY
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 01 10 01 – GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.1
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and
completion of the Work by the Contractor.
B.
Division 1: General requirements of the Project Manual governs the execution of Specification Section
within Divisions 2 through16.
C.
Summary of Work: Refer to Section 01100.
D.
The complete set of Contract Drawings and Specifications apply to this Work. The Contractor shall
become familiar with and coordinate work of related documents ands trades.
E.
Fallow contract Drawings and Specifications in layout of work.
F.
Provide labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for complete safe removal of existing items
designed to be removed and installation of new work, in conformity with applicable codes and
authorities having jurisdiction.
G.
The General Contractor shall visit the site and be fully familiar with conditions affecting the work, prior to
bidding project.
H.
Provide workers skilled in their trades, that have completed and received certification by a recognized
training program (or apprenticeship program) either private or union shop. At no time shall training
program students be allowed to work or make installations without de direct supervision of a certified
mechanic. Uncertified workers, laborers, helpers and the like will not be allowed to perform assembly
work. Ensure completed installations present a neat, organized, coordinated and clean cut appearance.
I.
Verify exact electrical service requirements for each piece of equipment. Provide proper service for
each.
J.
Include work shown in the drawings and specifications except where there is specific reference to work
not in contract (NIC).
K.
Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, Drawings and/or Specifications indicate
furnishing and installing each item, regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated as
part of the description. Where a conflict occurs, assume the more expensive or complete solution.
L.
No exclusions from, or limitations in, the language used in the Drawings or Specifications shall be
interpreted as meaning that the appurtenances or accessories necessary to complete any required
system or item of equipment are to be omitted. Contractor shall furnish and install any components, or
accessories necessary to provide complete working systems.
M.
The drawings utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate various items of Work. These do not
have dimensional significance nor do they delineate every item required for the intended installation.
Install Work in accordance with the intent diagrammatically shown on the Drawings, and in conformity
with the dimensions indicated on final Contract Drawings and on shop drawings. No interpretation shall
be made from the limitations of symbols and diagrams that any elements necessary for complete Work
are Excluded.
June 23, 2014
01 10 01 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
N.
Certain details appear on the Drawings which are specific with regard to the dimensioning and
positioning of the Work. These details are intended only for the purpose of establishing general
feasibility. Contractor shall be responsible for field coordination necessary for the indicated work.
O.
Derive general construction information from Structural Drawings and Specifications only.
P.
The use of words in the singular shall not be considered as limiting where other indications denote that
more than one item is referred to.
1.2
CONTRACTOR RESPONSABILITIES
A.
The Contractor shall provide one full time on site superintendent for duration of Project, dedicated to
this specific Project.
B.
The Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors shall each provide one full time dedicated on site project
foreman for their respective trades for the duration of the Project.
C.
The Contractor, prior to start the Work, shall furnish the Contracting Officer with the name or names and
emergency telephone numbers of staff who can be contacted during non working hours, including
weekends, for assistance during the life of the Contract should leaks and other damage develop in the
areas Work.
D.
Environmental Control Officer:
1.
2.
E.
Energy Conservation Officer:
1.
2.
F.
Contractor shall designate one of his staff as “Environmental Control Officer.” The duties of such
designee include responsibility for enforcing the environmental protection provisions of the
Specifications, the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act, and other applicable
Federal, State and local standards.
The contractor shall submit, for approval by the Contracting Officer, the intended traffic flow plan,
security plan, program for temporary structures, housecleaning plan, and demolition plan. Upon
approval of the Contracting Officer, the implementation and enforcement of these plans shall
become the responsibility of the Environmental Control Officer. Any changes in the programs
must be requested by the Contractor through the Environmental Control Officer for written
concurrence by the Contracting Officer.
Contractor shall designate one of his staff as “Energy Conservation Officer.” The duties of such
designee shall include the development and implementation of a program for minimizing the use
of energy on the site.
The program, after approval by the Contracting Officer, shall be posted in conspicuous location
so that all personnel employed on the Project may be aware of the need to conserve energy at all
times.
Construction Security Representative: Contractor shall designate one of his staff as “Construction
Security Representative,” and submit the name of such individual to the Contracting Officer for approval
and shall not change the assignment without written approval from the Contracting Officer.
June 23, 2014
01 10 01 2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
G.
The following are prohibited on the Project site: Alcohol, explosives, nonprescription drugs, illicit drugs,
weapons, gambling, recording devices, radios, photo capable cellphones and cameras. An acceptable
standard of conduct and dress shall prevail. Shirts shall be worn at all times.
H.
Contractor is responsible for protection of tools and equipment and fro products at all times intended for
use in construction of the Project.
I.
It is recommended that locked gang work boxes be utilized for the storage of tools, equipment, and
materials.
J.
Types and radio frequencies of the communication devices Contractor intends to use shall receive
Government approval before the devices are used.
K.
Mixing and Pouring of Concrete:
1.
2.
3.
L.
1.3
Concrete pour schedule is to be submitted to the Government site security office through the
Government Construction Manager.
Seventy two hours notice must be provided prior to mixing and pouring concrete so that a
sufficient number of escorts, and /or monitors will be on hand prior to delivery of the material.
The area must be litter free and “broom clean” prior to concrete placement.
Welding Permit: Permits for welding or any open flame are required and shall be obtained from the
Construction Manager, during normal work hours, 72 hours prior to the performance of such work.
Welding of steel pipe and accessories shall be performed by certified welders only. Only tack welding of
pipe and accessories for the purpose of initial placement of materials during layout and assembly, prior
to final fabrication and welding, shall be permitted by non certified employees. Training and/or practice
welds by non certified personnel shall not be permitted.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Refer to Section 01320 for additional definitions.
B.
“CM”: Government Construction Manager or his designated representative.
C.
“CO”: Government Contracting Officer, or his designated representative.
D.
“COTR”: Government Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative.
E.
“Specialist”: An individual or firm of established reputation (or, if newly organized, whose personnel
have previously established a reputation in that same field) whish is regularly engaged in, and which
maintains a regular force of workmen skilled in manufacturing or fabricating items required by the
Contract: Where the Specifications require installation by the Specialist, that term shall also be deemed
to mean the manufacturer, or an individual or firm who will perform the work under the manufacturer’s
supervision.
June 23, 2014
01 10 01 3
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Building 1100 Café
1.4
Bid Documents
SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS:
A. In addition to requirements specified on Part II, Section I, FAR 52.236 21, entitled “Specifications and
Drawings for Construction”, the procedures noted in Section 01330 will also be applicable.
B. Shop drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules, and other data specifically prepared for the Project by
the Contractor, subcontractor, manufacturer, or supplier to illustrate a portion of the Project.
C. Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams,
and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate a portion of the Project.
D. Samples are physical examples that illustrate material, equipment, or workmanship and establish
standards by which a portion of the Project will be judged.
E. The Contractor shall not perform work requiring submittals until respective submittals have been
approved. Such work shall be in accordance with approved submittals.
F. Shop drawings, product data, samples, and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The
Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviation from requirements of the Contract
Documents by approval of submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Engineer, in
writing, of such deviations at the time of submission and written approval has been obtained by the
Contractor for specified deviations.
1.5
CHANGES IN THE WORK
A.
The government, without invalidating the Contract, may order Changes in work consisting of additions,
deletions, or modifications, the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All
such changes in the Work shall be authorized by written Change Order signed by the Contracting
Officer
B.
The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by a Contract Order.
C.
The cost or credit to the Government from a change in the Scope of Work shall be determined by FAR
52.243 4, “Changes”, in Part II, Section I, Contract Clauses 6.
1.6. USE OF EQUIPMENT BY GOVERNMENT
A. The government may take control and operate, with Government employees, such equipment as is
necessary for heating or cooling or operating such areas of the building as require the service, as soon as
installation is sufficiently complete.
B. The Contracting Officer will advise the Contractor by letter, prior to use of equipment, which items of
equipment will be operated, and the date and time such operation will begin.
C. Government operation of equipment will not relieve the Contractor of the one year guarantee on materials
and workmanship elsewhere provided for in this Contract.
1.7. SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. In addition to requirement of FAR 52.236 15, Part II, Section I, the following shall apply:
June 23, 2014
01 10 01 4
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
1.
The sequence of procedures shall include the work which shall begin in definite construction
sections or areas and which shall be completed before work in other operational sections or
areas is begun. The operational sections or areas shall be defined in detail in the Construction
Schedule, by the Contractor. The contractor shall, when establishing the construction sections or
areas, coordinate de sections or areas with the Construction Manager so that actual construction
work will cause as little interference as possible with Government operations. Approval of the
construction sections or areas shall be obtained from the Construction Manager prior to the start
of Work at the site. The contractor shall coordinate the work of all trades to minimize interference
of work between trades.
2.
The Government reserves the right to bring other contractor into the area designated for work
under this Contract for whatever reasons necessary at any time, for any length of time. The
General Contractor will coordinate the Work of his Contract with other government contractors
and develop agreeable work schedules with the government Construction Manager.
1.8. WAGE DETERMINATION
A. The wage determination attached in Part III of this solicitation will be used to conform with the
requirements of the Labor Standards Provision.
1.9. SITE SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to Section 01105 for additional requirements.
B. The Government reserves the right to exclude or remove from the site any employee of the Contractor or
subcontractor that the Government deems careless, insubordinate or otherwise objectionable or whose
continued employment or access on the site is deemed by the Government to be contrary to the best
interests of the Government. The Contractor agrees to immediately remove persons from the site if
notified by the Government that conduct standards are unsatisfactory. The Contractor understands and
agrees that the Government shall be held harmless for any action arising from employees being denied
access on the basis of conduct or Project participation, and that reason for such action will not be
enumerated by the Government.
C. The Contractor shall make it a specific provision of his subcontractors that the following security
regulations will be observed by personnel on the Project, and that the facilities and procedures described
in the following subparagraphs will be made operative at the commencement of Work under this Contract.
1. Only United States citizens are permitted to work on the construction site.
2. Naturalized United States citizens are required to present to the Government site security officer
a copy of their certificate of naturalization. The certificate of naturalization must be present when
the individual reports to the site for work the first time or the individual will not be allowed access.
3. The Contractor and subcontractor shall provide information regarding personnel who require or
cease to require continuing access to the site. The name of all workers on the site shall be kept
current. In order to permit the Government to supply badges to allow access for on site
personnel, Contractor shall cause each individual to fill out a Form 4311 (Badge Request Form).
The Form 4311 will be provided in advance by the Government to the Contractor.
4. The Contractor shall allow ½ an hour for in processing at the start of each work shift. In
processing will start at 0700 hours for the day shift and 1600 hours for the nigh shift. The
contractor shall stop work prior to the end of each shift, at minimum, one laborer, on a continuous
basis, dedicated to housekeeping tasks related to jobsite cleanup. Housekeeping tasks shall
include, but not limited to: cleaning of Contractor traffic areas, organization of equipment,
supplies, tools, materials, sweeping, vacuuming, dust protection, trash removal, etc., during and
after each work day. Additional personnel shall be provided as required, to compensate for
cleanup activities of which the volume cannot be met by a single employee. At no time shall work
June 23, 2014
01 10 01 5
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Building 1100 Café
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Bid Documents
areas affected by the Contractor, be left in a dirty, dusty, cluttered, unorganized or unsafe
condition(s). Public areas affected by the Contractor shall be returned to conditions equal to or
better than those found upon arrival of the contractor, daily.
The badge furnished by the Government to each contractor employee or other person granted
access to the site will serve to authorize the wearer to enter and leave the construction site under
escort. The badge shall be worn on the upper part of the body so as to be clearly visible at all
times when on the work site.
Visitor badges will be provided for persons who are identified as having an infrequent or
temporary legitimate business need for access to the site.
Security checks will be made on all Contractor employees. Falsification of the PHS or violation of
the site security/safety/code of conduct requirements will result in access to the site being denied.
Random personnel/vehicle property inspection will be conducted by security.
Positive identification will be required from all construction personnel. The explanation that a
worker has no identification or that identification was left at home is sufficient grounds to deny site
access.
1.10 SITE ACTIVITIES AND PHYSICAL SECURITY
A. Site access controls will be implemented and enforced. Access to this Project will be limited and may
cause some inconvenience for workers.
B. Normally, site will be open to Contractors access between 0700 hours and 1900 hours, Monday through
Friday and 0700 hours to 1700 hours on Saturday. Materials and equipments shall be delivered outside
the above hours shall be made in writing to the Government. The Government Construction Manager will
immediately transfer such requirements to the Government Security Officer and receive approval.
C. Material deliveries to the site by noncontractor vehicles will require a bill of landing before being given site
access. Driver identification is required and entries are made a matter of record.
D. Contractor access will be restricted to the designated construction area of the building.
E. No walk on or replacement workers will be allowed on site unless previously cleared by the Government
Security Office. The Contractor is responsible for notifying the Government Site Security Office in
advance of new and replacement workers.
F. Personal vehicles belonging to construction personnel will be required to park within a specifically
identified area. Additionally, all such vehicles are subject to search.
G. Vehicles exiting the Project site will be subject to security inspection.
H. Lunch boxes, tool boxes, gang work boxes, etc. are subject to inspection by the Government site security
officers at their discretion.
1.11 SECURITY PLANNING
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Government Site Security Office through the Government Construction
Manager a copy of work schedule on a weekly basis by noon every Thursday. To assist Government
security planning and staffing, and to help in avoiding security required delays, Contractor shall submit, in
June 23, 2014
01 10 01 6
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
writing, to the Government Site Security Office through the Government Construction Manager, not less
than one week in advance of the anticipated event, notice of the potential overtime situation, proposed
concerns, and other potentials for changes in the established security operations.
1.12 SECURITY ESCORTS
A. Security escorts provided by the Government will be required to accompany construction personnel at all
the times while at the site. The Contractor is encouraged to bring lunch to the site to minimize crew time
in leaving and re entering the Base or to make use of the lunch wagon on Base.
1. The Contractor shall give the Government Construction Manager, 3 working days notice os
schedule changes. This notice is required so that security escorts may be provided.
1.13 SITE EMERGENCIES
A. In case of emergency or other crisis situation, the Government Security Officer will have the right to shut
down the site and have construction personnel leave the site.
1.14 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall procure and maintain the following minimum insurance coverage during the entire
period of performance under this Contract.
TYPE
AMOUNT
Comprehensive General Liability
$ 500,000 per occurrence
Motor Vehicle Liability
$ 200,000 per occurrence (for each motor vehicle)
Bodily Injury or Death
$ 500,000 per Occurrence
Property Damage
$ 20,000 per Occurrence
Others
As required by State Law
END OF SECTION 01 10 01
June 23, 2014
01 10 01 7
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 01 10 05 – SITE AND CONSTRUCTION SECURITY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Other general provisions of Construction Contract, including Contract Clauses and Conditions (CC&C),
Supplemental Contract Clauses and Conditions, and other Division 1 sections of these Contract
Specifications, apply to requirements of this Section; this Section in turn applies to Contract Drawings
and to Division 2 through 16 sections of these Contract Specifications.
1.
1.2
Refer to Section 01500, “Temporary Facilities” for temporary physical facilities at Project Site,
which are related to special security requirements of this Section.
DESCRIPTION
A.
General Description: The work of this section involves.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Security procedures for access to the base.
Security procedures at the construction site.
Screening, briefings and debriefings for personnel, consultants, and visitors involved in the work.
Accommodating surveillance and inspection by Government at Project Site
Restrictions upon related actions and use of facilities.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with Government’s requirements for participating in Project security procedures as specified,
and as requested subsequent to award of Construction Contract. Afford unrestricted access to work
and allow surveillance and inspection by Government security personnel. Maintain security, and avoid
compromise of products caused by unauthorized disclosures of and access to, the work and its
associated documentation. Maintain appropriate security procedures for personnel.
1.
1.4
Government reserves right to modify security provisions of this contract based on changing
circumstances, activities of construction personnel, and security integrity of material, equipment
and tools, to be installed or used in the project.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Access to the Base: Where access to the base is required for contractors, subcontractors,
inspection/test laboratory’s personnel, consultants, tradesmen, and others performing work associated
with this project, submit a personal biography form containing the following information to the COTR a
minimum of 72 hours in advance of the first requested access. The information must only be submitted
one time for each person. The Government reserves the right to deny access to the base to any of the
contractor’s personnel.
1.
2.
3.
June 23, 2014
Full Name.
Social Security Number.
Date and Place of Birth.
01 10 05 1
SITE & CONSTRUCTION SECURITY
Building 1100 Café
4.
5.
6.
B.
Bid Documents
Company.
Justification for Access.
Date access is required with arrival time and estimated departure time.
Weekly Access Request: On the Thursday morning prior to each work week, by 1000 A.M., submit to
the COTR or his designated representative and access request documenting the estimated access
requirements for the next week (Sunday through Saturday). List the subcontractors, visitors, deliveries,
and special work requirements for each working day and the hours of work. This request will be used by
the Base to schedule monitors. A form will be provided by the Government.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL SECURITY PROCEDURES
A.
Personnel.
1.
All contractor personnel requiring access to the base must be U.S. Citizens.
2.
Require employees and other personnel working on behalf of Contractor to adhere to policies,
regulations and procedures of Base regarding conduct, behavior and security matters. At
Government’s option, the Government may remove Contractor personnel failing to comply with
security requirements, and their access to work may be prohibited. Resulting costs shall be
borne entirely by Contractor.
3.
Personal Behavior: A zero tolerance policy is in affect, including but not limited to speeding,
vulgar language, harassing behavior, dress attire, and substance abuse.
4.
Violations: Failure of Contractor to comply with required procedures, and security requirements,
may result in denial of access to the base. Contractor shall bear entire cost to terminate, remove
and replace offending persons and engaged firms.
a.
B.
Notification and Reporting: Notify the COTR immediately when breaches of security occur.
Extend requirement to employees and other personnel working on behalf of Contractor,
and expand responsibility to include prompt reporting of security issues, including observed
efforts by unauthorized persons to gain unauthorized access to site, unauthorized
photography, unauthorized movement outside the project site, and possession of articles
forbidden under security procedures.
Access to Base: Comply with following security provisions related to Project Site operations and
procedures.
1.
2.
3.
June 23, 2014
Access: Approval must be granted prior to anyone entering the site. Each applicant for site
access must be U.S. citizen possessing a valid pictured driver’s license or pictured ID.
Bio Forms: At least 72 hours prior to the first visit by each applicant, submit a Camp Peary
security form in compliance with the submittals requirements of this specification. Blank security
forms will be provided.
Hours of Work: Normal hours of operation for the Base are 0700 1900, Monday through Friday
and 0700 through 1700 on Saturday. Work is not permitted outside these times and on Sundays
unless approved in advance by the COTR.
01 10 05 2
SITE & CONSTRUCTION SECURITY
Building 1100 Café
4.
Holidays – The following United States Government Holidays will be observed. Work is not
allowed on these holidays unless specifically approved in advance by COTR (exception may be
made for the Holidays followed by a *):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
5.
C.
2.
3.
USG Schedule Changes – Shut down may be required for the convenience of the Government
due to training activities requirements. If so, COTR will notify contractor in advance. In the event
that the Government temporarily shuts down the project, the Contract Time will be extended a
corresponding number of days, for those days not already specified in the contract..
All workers must obtain a visitor badge and a vehicle permit before entering the site. Authorized
visitors will be issued a visitor badge based upon presentation of a valid driver’s license with a
picture identification. Require employees to wear badges prominently displayed on outer garment
while on base.
Workers must leave their badges at the Visitor Control Center upon leaving the base.
Loss of badge, or repeated failure to comply with required surrender of badge may, at the
Government Security Representative’s discretion, result in the person being denied access to
Project Site at no cost to Government.
Monitors
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
E.
New Year’s Day
Martin Luther King Day *
President’s Day *
Memorial Day
Independence Day
Labor Day
Columbus Day *
Veteran’s Day*
Thanksgiving Day
Christmas Day
Identification Badges.
1.
D.
Bid Documents
Provide a weekly access request in accordance with the submittals section of this specification.
The Government will provide monitors for contractor personnel while on base. Point Of Contact
(POC): Kevin A. Panchison, Architect/Construction Manager (757) 229 2121 ext. 2332
Security monitors are required to accompany uncleared contractor personnel at all times while on
base. Contractor personnel will be required to cooperate with Security Monitors. Notify monitors
when leaving and arriving site.
Notification: Notify COTR and Monitor POC prior to anticipated start of the planned work
schedule.
Time Extensions: Give minimum 4 hours notice to the monitor when it is anticipated that
construction activities will need to continue past normal working hours. Coordinate duration of
additional work with COTR and monitors.
Vehicle Placards: Placards will be distributed each morning to each vehicle by the monitor at the
VCC when being badged, and must be displayed in the windshield of contractor vehicles while on
base.
Contractors are required to transit directly from gate to work site, and directly from work site to
gate. Deviations may lead to temporary or permanent revocation of base access privileges.
Deliveries: All delivery schedules must be given to the Monitor Manager the day prior to delivery.
Delivery hours are from 0700 1630.
Inspection.
June 23, 2014
01 10 05 3
SITE & CONSTRUCTION SECURITY
Building 1100 Café
F.
1.
Search Procedures: Government reserves the right to conduct searches of belongings of
Contractor’s personnel both at points of entry and exit to the base, entry and exit to the project
site, and at any time while personnel are on base. Persons entering and leaving Project Site may
be required to pass through walk through metal detector (WTMD) device.
2.
Provide tool lockers in protected space inside Project Site for convenience of employees who
elect to leave personal tools, devices, and protective gear at Project Site in lieu of subjecting such
items to gate security procedures.
Security Procedures at the Construction Site: Erect temporary barriers with a single entrance and a
guard booth to define the Contractor’s work area. All contractor personnel, vehicles, facilities, and
equipment must be contained within the temporary barrier. Workers may, at the COTR’s sole option,
have the opportunity to park in designated parking areas within sight line of the project site. The
Government will post a guard or escort at the project site to control entry and exit and monitor the work
area during working hours. Secure the work area at the end of each work day. Contractor’s personnel
are required to remain within the fenced work area except for entry and exit from the base. Except as
specifically authorized by the COTR, the Contractor’s Personnel are not permitted to use any base
facilities such as toilets, the dining room, infirmary, or base store. Refer to conditions for use of specific
Government facilities in Section 01500 “Temporary Facilities and Controls.”
1.
G.
Bid Documents
Coordinate width of Site entry gate with base Fire Department to ensure proper clearance for
emergency vehicles.
Miscellaneous Site Security Requirements.
1.
Briefings: Government reserves the right to conduct briefings and debriefings for persons at all
levels of involvement in performance of work and maintenance of security.
2.
Key Control: Control of keys and lock combinations is essential for Government’s project security.
Use construction cores during project and blank replacements 1 for each lock cylinder. Do not
allow keys to be duplicated or removed from Project Site, nor allow lock combinations to be
divulged without Government approval. Such loss of control may result in requirement to change
locks involved at Contractor’s expense. Provide duplicate keys and lock combinations to the
Government as requested for the purpose of security inspections and emergency actions; include
keys/combinations needed for unrestricted access to every area and element of Project,
toolboxes, parked machines, storage units, and similar locations. The Government’s security
representative will assume responsibility for control of such duplicate keys/combinations. Final
lock cores and security devices must be turned over to Government.
3.
Vehicle Control: Vehicle passes will be issued at the Visitor Control Center for authorized
vehicles. Park vehicles on Project Site within the fenced work area or the area designated by the
COTR. Vehicles are not permitted outside this area except for direct travel between the entrance
and the construction site. Upon passing through Visitor Control Center at perimeter gate vehicles
and drivers will be subject to search and inspection.
a.
b.
c.
June 23, 2014
Persons operating motor vehicles of any kind (including construction equipment) on Base
must have a valid driver’s license. Contractor personnel in violation of this regulation will be
reported to the State Police.
Schedule deliveries and hauling away of material at Project Site to occur during regular
working hours.
Provide one day’s advance notice on major delivery arrival times, and provide seven day’s
advance notice of deliveries which must be accommodated/accepted at times other than
regular working hours; otherwise, deliveries are subject to indefinite admittance delays at
Contractor’s expense.
01 10 05 4
SITE & CONSTRUCTION SECURITY
Building 1100 Café
H.
Bid Documents
4.
Inspections by Government: Government reserves unqualified and unlimited right at any time to
conduct inspections of personnel, work, material, equipment, and temporary facilities at Project
Site.
5.
Wanted Persons: Any contractor personnel found to be wanted by Federal, State, local or other
law enforcement authorities shall be taken into custody by the Base Police or security forces, and
turned over to the appropriate authorities.
Prohibited/Restricted Items & Photography.
1.
Prohibited/Restricted Items and activities on Base include but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Photography, General: The use of photographic equipment and taking of photographs is
restricted on the base. Submit written requests for approval of photography well in advance of
time intended for such activity, stating reasons and uses intended for such photographs, and
disposition of negatives. Before release or use of photographs and negatives, submit to COTR
for review; Government reserves the right to deny such use and release. Limit use and release to
authorized purposes/distribution.
a.
b.
3.
Photographs of vehicles and personnel other than the contractor’s forces are prohibited.
Photographs of buildings and areas of the base outside the area of work are prohibited.
Communications:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Firearms and other weapons.
Electronic and communication devices: Not permitted inside occupied Government
buildings.
Drugs, including narcotics, barbiturates, marijuana, alcoholic beverages, and similar
substances, except for use with valid medical prescription.
Explosives.
Cameras, including film, digital, and video cameras, except as specifically authorized by
the COTR.
Radios: Two way radios are not allowed inside occupied buildings.
Cell Phones and Nextels: Allowed but must be off when inside buildings.
Provide radio frequencies to the COTR.
Telephone: A telephone line and a fax line will be provided by the Base with an on Base
extension for the contractor’s construction trailer. The number will be given to the
contractor by the technician and all long distance calls will be charged back to the
contractor.
Publicity: Avoid all publicity connected with this project and base. Do not publish or knowingly
permit to be published any plan, specification, textural description, or other information related to
the project without written approval of the CO. Project signs will not be permitted.
END OF SECTION 01 10 05
June 23, 2014
01 10 05 5
SITE & CONSTRUCTION SECURITY
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
USE OF PREMISES
A.
Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond
areas in which the Work is indicated.
1.
Limits: Confine construction operations to the Limit of Work indicated.
2.
Security Limits: Establish a fenced work area with a single entrance, unless otherwise directed by
COTR and guard booth. Except when entering and departing from the base, confine all
personnel, vehicles, temporary facilities and equipment to within the fenced work area. Contractor
personnel are not permitted to leave the fenced work area without the approval of the guard or
monitor.
3.
Government Occupancy:
construction.
4.
Driveways, Roadways and Entrances: Keep driveways, roadways and entrances serving
adjacent premises clear and available to the Government, the Government's employees, and
emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a.
b.
Allow for Government occupancy of areas outside of the limits of
Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and
equipment on site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01140
June 23, 2014
01 14 00 1
WORK RESTRICTIONS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the
Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Government
decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the
products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.
1.
2.
1.4
The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to
incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
The Contractor shall indicated, at the time of submitting pricing for alternates, if there will be any
adjustments to the Contact Time.
PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the
alternate into Project.
1.
2.
Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.
Include as part of each alternate, costs of related coordination, modification, or adjustment.
B.
Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the
status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later
consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.
C.
Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D.
Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections
referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described
under each alternate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
June 23, 2014
01 23 00 1
ALTERNATES
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A.
Refer to U.S. Government’s Invitation For Bid (IFB) for listing and description of Bid Alternates.
END OF SECTION 01 23 00
June 23, 2014
01 23 00 2
ALTERNATES
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 01 25 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract
modifications.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Section 01230 "Alternates" for procedural requirements for handling and processing alternates.
Section 01270 "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements for using unit prices.
Section 01600 "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for
substitutions made after Contract award.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A.
1.4
Contracting Officer will issue, through the COTR, supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes
in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
REQUESTS FOR PROPOSAL (RFP’s)
A.
Government Initiated Requests for Proposal: The COTR will issue, a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1.
2.
Proposal Requests issued by the COTR may either request a cost only, or may be a direction to
proceed. Follow instructions included in RFP’s with respect to stopping work in progress or
executing the proposed change.
Submit a Proposal outlining adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to
execute the change. Submit by date indicated in instructions
a.
b.
c.
June 23, 2014
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and
activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
01 25 00 1
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
B.
Contractor Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract,
Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the COTR.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.5
Bid Documents
Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work.
Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed
change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of
purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change,
including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity
relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change
requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A.
1.6
On Government's approval of a Proposal Request, the Contracting Officer will issue a Change Order for
signatures by the Government and the Contractor.
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A.
Construction Change Directive: The Government’s Contracting Officer may issue a Construction
Change Directive. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the
Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1.
B.
Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also
designates methods to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract
Time.
Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
1.
After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 25 00
June 23, 2014
01 25 00 2
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process
Applications for Payment.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Section 01210
"Allowances" for procedural requirements for handling and processing
allowances.
Section 01230 "Alternates" for procedural requirements for handling and processing alternates.
Section 01270 "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements for using unit prices.
Section 01250 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling
changes to the Contract.
Section 01320
"Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements
governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals
Schedule.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to
various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
1.
Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and
schedules, including the following:
a.
b.
2.
B.
Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
Submittals Schedule.
Submit the Schedule of Values to the Government’s Representative at earliest possible date but
no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for
Payment.
Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the
Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
June 23, 2014
01 29 00 1
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
1.
Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Project name and location.
Name of Architect.
Architect's project number.
Contractor's name and address.
Date of submittal.
Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for
each item listed:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Related Specification Section or Division.
Description of the Work.
Separated by material and labor values.
Change Orders (numbers) that affect value with brief description.
Dollar value.
1)
Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one hundredth percent, adjusted to total
100 percent.
3.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of
Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of
contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate.
4.
Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5.
Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored,
but not yet installed.
a.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Differentiate between items stored on site and items stored off site. Include evidence of
insurance or bonded warehousing if required.
Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show
line item value of unit cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured
quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.
Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include
total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a.
1.5
Bid Documents
Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work in
place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed
as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Application for
Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the
Contract Sum.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
June 23, 2014
01 29 00 2
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
A.
Bid Documents
Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified
by Architect and the Government’s Representative and paid for by the Government.
1.
Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and
final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B.
Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between the Government and the Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each
Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C.
Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets
as form for Applications for Payment, unless other forms are provided by the Government.
D.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized
to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. The Government’s Representative will return
incomplete applications without action.
1.
2.
E.
Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to the
Government’s Representative by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include
waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.
1.
F.
Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use
updated schedules if revisions were made.
Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of
construction period covered by application.
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from
every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the
Work covered by the payment.
1.
Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for retainage, on
each item.
2.
When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
3.
The Government reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4.
Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of mechanic's lien
for construction period covered by the application.
a.
5.
G.
Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity
involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to
a lien.
Waiver Forms:
Government.
Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to the
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with
submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
June 23, 2014
01 29 00 3
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
H.
10.
11.
12.
13.
List of subcontractors.
Schedule of Values.
Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
Products list.
Schedule of unit prices.
Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).
List of Contractor's staff assignments.
List of Contractor's principal consultants.
Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the
Work.
Initial progress report.
Report of preconstruction conference.
Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
Performance and payment bonds.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work
claimed as substantially complete.
1.
2.
J.
List of subcontractors.
Schedule of Values.
Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
Products list.
Schedule of unit prices.
Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).
List of Contractor's staff assignments.
List of Contractor's principal consultants.
Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the
Work.
Initial progress report.
Report of preconstruction conference.
Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
Performance and payment bonds.
All Subsequent Applications for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must coincide with
submittal of each Application for Payment include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
I.
Bid Documents
Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement
showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for
Government occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
June 23, 2014
Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes,
fees, and similar obligations were paid.
Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
01 29 00 4
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
7.
8.
9.
Bid Documents
Evidence that claims have been settled.
Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of
Substantial Completion or when the Government took possession of and assumed responsibility
for corresponding elements of the Work.
Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 29 00
June 23, 2014
01 29 00 5
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
General project coordination procedures.
Conservation.
Coordination Drawings.
Administrative and supervisory personnel.
Project meetings.
Section 01320
"Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting the
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Section 01700 "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation
and field engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to
ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations,
included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and
operation.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its
own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at
meetings.
1.
June 23, 2014
Prepare similar memoranda for the Government and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
01 31 00 1
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
Building 1100 Café
C.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures
with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure
orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into,
the Work.
Existing Utility Interruptions: Arrange with the utility company, the COTR, and existing users for time
when existing utility services may be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for new services.
Provide a minimum of 72 hours advance notice to the COTR of any interruption of utility services.
1.
1.4
Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Preinstallation conferences.
Project closeout activities.
Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1.
E.
Bid Documents
Clearly indicate in Contractor’s Construction Schedule, all utility taps and other activities that will
interrupt utility services. Update anticipated schedule of utility work as construction progresses.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates
maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is
required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Staff Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a Project Directory listing
principal staff assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site.
Include all Subcontractors. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and
telephone numbers, including home, office and cellular/Nextel telephone numbers. Provide names,
addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals
assigned to Project.
1.
1.5
Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
Indicate required installation sequences.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" and Division 16 Section
"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for specific Coordination Drawing requirements for
mechanical and electrical installations.
Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary
telephone. Distribute list to COTR.
ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A.
General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel
as required for proper performance of the Work.
1.6
PROJECT MEETINGS
June 23, 2014
01 31 00 2
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
Building 1100 Café
A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required,
of date and time of each meeting. Notify the COTR of scheduled meeting dates and times.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting
minutes to the COTR, all other attendees, and others concerned, within 3 days of the meeting.
Preconstruction Conference: The Government will schedule a preconstruction conference before
starting construction, at a time convenient to the Contractor, but no later than 15 days after execution of
the Agreement. The conference will be held at Project site or another convenient location. Contractor
shall conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1.
Attendees: The COTR and other authorized representatives of the Government, the Architect,
and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers;
suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the
conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
C.
Bid Documents
Tentative construction schedule.
Phasing.
Critical work sequencing.
Designation of responsible personnel.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
Distribution of the Contract Documents.
Submittal procedures.
Preparation of Record Documents.
Use of the premises.
Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
Parking availability.
Office, work, and storage areas.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
First aid.
Security.
Progress cleaning.
Working hours.
Fire, emergency and life safety procedures and controls.
Preinstallation Conferences:
conferences at Project site.
When specifically requested by the COTR, conduct preinstallation
1.
Attendees: As directed by COTR. Generally, installer and representatives of manufacturers and
fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other
materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting.
2.
Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular
activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
June 23, 2014
Contract Documents.
Options.
Related Change Orders.
Purchases.
Deliveries.
Submittals.
01 31 00 3
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
Building 1100 Café
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
D.
Bid Documents
Review of mockups.
Possible conflicts.
Compatibility problems.
Time schedules.
Weather limitations.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
Warranty requirements.
Compatibility of materials.
Acceptability of substrates.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Space and access limitations.
Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
Testing and inspecting requirements.
Required performance results.
Protection of construction and personnel.
3.
Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements.
4.
Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate
whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and
reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with
preparation of payment requests.
1.
Attendees: In addition to the COTR, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity
concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future
activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be
familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other
items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to
status of Project.
a.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine
whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to
Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be
expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule
revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed
within the Contract Time.
b.
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
June 23, 2014
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Utility interruptions
Work hours.
Hazards and risks.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
01 31 00 4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
Building 1100 Café
14)
15)
16)
3.
Bid Documents
Change Orders.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
Two week look ahead.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should
have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous
meeting and report.
a.
Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised
schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 31 00
June 23, 2014
01 31 00 5
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Preliminary Construction Schedule.
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Submittals Schedule.
Material location reports.
Field condition reports.
Special reports.
Section 01290 "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.
Section 01310 "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting
and conference minutes.
Section 01330 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
Section 01400 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections.
Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic negatives as Project Record
Documents at Project closeout.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and
controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and
resources.
1.
2.
Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early
start and finish times to avoid delays.
Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given activity can be started.
B.
CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where
activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities
can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C.
Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that establishes
the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D.
Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
June 23, 2014
01 32 00 1
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
Building 1100 Café
E.
Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1.
2.
3.
Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Government or the Contractor, but is
a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule
milestones and Contract completion date.
Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early
start of the following activity.
Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely
affecting the planned Project completion date.
F.
Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater
detail.
G.
Major Area: A story or phase of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction
element.
H.
Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.
I.
Network Diagram:
relationships.
1.4
A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article and in house
scheduling personnel to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed
projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
B.
Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular
format:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.5
Bid Documents
Scheduled date for first submittal.
Specification Section number and title.
Submittal category (action or informational).
Name of subcontractor.
Description of the Work covered.
Scheduled date for COTR’s final release or approval.
C.
Preliminary Construction Schedule: At the Pre construction meeting, submit two printed copies; one a
single sheet of reproducible media, and one a print.
D.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit within 14 days of execution of the Contract for
Construction or before the start of construction activities, whichever occurs first. Provide two printed
copies of initial schedule, one a reproducible print and one a blue or black line print, large enough to
show entire schedule for entire construction period.
E.
Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
F.
Accident Reports: Submit 2 copies within 24 hours of incident.
G.
Special Reports: Submit two copies at time of unusual event.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
June 23, 2014
01 32 00 2
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
Building 1100 Café
A.
1.6
Bid Documents
Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction
activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B.
Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts,
Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.
1.
2.
C.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.
Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in
proper sequence.
Auxiliary Services: Provide auxiliary services requested, including access to Project site and use of
temporary facilities including temporary lighting.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A.
Preparation: Provide a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by
construction schedule.
Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1.
2.2
Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling."
B.
Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion.
1.
C.
Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early
completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element
of the Work. Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically
allowed by COTR.
Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major
items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement
cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and
delivery.
Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section
"Submittal Procedures" in schedule.
Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's
Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
Startup and Testing Time: Include an activity for startup and testing.
June 23, 2014
01 32 00 3
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
Building 1100 Café
5.
D.
Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial
Completion, and allow time for COTR’s administrative procedures necessary for certification of
Substantial Completion.
Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as
follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1.
Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
2.
Work by Government: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by the
Government or Government’s separate Contractors.
3.
Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
E.
Bid Documents
Coordination with existing construction.
Uninterruptible services.
Use of premises restrictions.
Provisions for future construction.
Seasonal variations.
Environmental control.
Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual
costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of
payment requests.
1.
Refer to Section 01290 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.
F.
Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission,
prepare a time impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the
overall project schedule.
G.
Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H.
Identification of activities that have changed.
Changes in early and late start dates.
Changes in early and late finish dates.
Changes in activity durations in workdays.
Changes in the critical path.
Changes in total float or slack time.
Changes in the Contract Time.
Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates.
1.
2.
3.
4.
In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value.
In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value.
In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list
date.
Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress
meetings.
a.
b.
June 23, 2014
In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative value
completed" with total at bottom.
Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled progress
meeting.
01 32 00 4
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
Building 1100 Café
2.3
Bid Documents
REPORTS
A.
Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information
concerning events at Project site:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
List of subcontractors at Project site.
List of separate contractors at Project site.
Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
Accidents.
Meetings and significant decisions.
Unusual events (refer to special reports).
Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
Meter readings and similar recordings.
Emergency procedures.
Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
Change Orders received and implemented.
Construction Change Directives received.
Services connected and disconnected.
Equipment or system tests and startups.
Partial Completions and occupancies.
Substantial Completions authorized.
B.
Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare a comprehensive list of materials delivered to
and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items
recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items
of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site.
C.
Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the
Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information. Include a
detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract
Documents.
2.4
SPECIAL REPORTS
A.
General: Submit special reports directly to the COTR within one day of an occurrence. Distribute
copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B.
Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site,
whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events,
persons participating and/or affected by occurrence, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of
results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise COTR in advance when these events are
known or predictable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual
construction progress and activities. Issue schedule updates concurrent with requests for payment.
June 23, 2014
01 32 00 5
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
Building 1100 Café
1.
2.
3.
B.
Bid Documents
Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.
Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to,
changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to the COTR, separate contractors, testing and
inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need to know schedule
responsibility.
1.
2.
Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same
locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the
Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
END OF SECTION 01 32 00
June 23, 2014
01 32 00 6
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Section 01290 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment.
Section 01310 "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting Coordination Drawings.
Section 01320 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports,
including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule and construction
photographs.
Section 01400 "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and Delegated
Design Submittals and for erecting mockups.
Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties Project Record Documents and
operation and maintenance manuals.
Section 01781
"Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires COTR’s responsive action.
B.
Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require COTR’s approval. Submittals may
be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.4
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will NOT be provided by
Architect or COTR for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction
activities.
1.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and
related activities that require sequential activity.
2.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing
will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
June 23, 2014
01 33 00 1
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
a.
C.
Contractor shall include mockups, if any, in submittal log.
Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on [COTR's or title II A/E receipt of submittal].
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
COTR reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other
submittals until related submittals are received.
Submittals Schedule:
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related
construction activities.
1.
D.
Bid Documents
Initial Review: Allow 15 days from [COTR’s or title II A/E receipt of submittal] for initial review of
each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with
subsequent submittals. COTR will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be
held for a longer period to permit review by Government’s consultant(s).
Consultant’s Review: Where review of submittals by Government’s consultant is deemed
necessary by the COTR, allow 21 days from COTR’s receipt of submittal for initial review.
If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.
Allow 15 days for processing each resubmittal.
No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals in a
timely manner.
No processing times will be shortened due to the Contractor’s late or untimely furnishing of
submittals.
No extension of the Contract time will be authorized because of repeated resubmittals.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2.
Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's
review and approval markings and action taken by COTR and/or Government’s consultants.
3.
Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Project name.
Date of submittal preparation.
Name and address of Architect.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of subcontractor.
Name and address of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Unique identifier, including revision number.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Number consecutively as they are sent in, starting with 001. All subcontractors must use
the General Contractors submittal numeration.
Note: If resubmitting, use same number followed by character, A, B, C, D, etc. for as many times
st
nd
as it is resubmitted. Ex. Submittal 012 is re submitted. 1 resubmission would be 012 A, 2
would be 012 B, etc.
F.
Deviations:
submittals.
June 23, 2014
Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on
01 33 00 2
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
G.
Submittal Quantities: Submit the number of copies required by the Contractor plus the following:
1.
2.
H.
COTR’s copies: Three.
Government’s consultant copies: Two, when required
Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless COTR observes
noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
1.
I.
Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and
will be returned.
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. COTR will return submittals, without review, received
from sources other than Contractor.
1.
On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information,
requests for data, revisions other than those requested by COTR on previous submittals, and
deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and
limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal.
2.
Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of
the Contract Documents.
3.
Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
J.
Project name.
Date.
Destination (To:).
Source (From:).
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
Category and type of submittal.
Submittal purpose and description.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
Remarks.
Signature of transmitter.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators,
installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction
activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
1.
K.
Bid Documents
Contractor is responsible for routing of submittals to and from his subcontractors, fabricators and
suppliers.
Use for Construction: Use only approved final submittals with mark indicating action taken by COTR in
connection with construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
June 23, 2014
01 33 00 3
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
1.
Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
a.
b.
B.
Initial Submittal: Submit three preliminary copies of each submittal where selection of
options, color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is required. COTR will return two
submittal with options selected.
Final Submittal: Submit three copies, unless additional copies are required for review by
Government’s consultant. One copy will be returned. Retain a copy as a Project Record
Document.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of
product or equipment.
1.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not
suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
C.
Bid Documents
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Standard color charts.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
Wiring diagrams showing factory installed wiring.
Printed performance curves.
Operational range diagrams.
Mill reports.
Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.
Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop
Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1.
Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
June 23, 2014
Dimensions.
Identification of products.
Fabrication and installation drawings.
Roughing in and setting diagrams.
Wiring diagrams showing field installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring.
Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
Templates and patterns.
Schedules.
Design calculations.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Clearly indicate adjacent construction, materials, methods of attachment, heights, levels
and other information to accurately show how the item will be incorporated into the Work
as a whole.
01 33 00 4
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
2.
Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer installed and field installed wiring.
3.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full size drawings, submit Shop Drawings
on sheets at least 8 1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.
a.
4.
Ensure that sufficient space is provided on sheet for review stamp.
Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows:
a.
b.
Initial Submittal: Submit three prints. COTR will return one print.
Final Submittal: Submit three prints, unless prints are required for operation and
maintenance manuals. Submit five prints where prints are required for operation and
maintenance manuals. COTR will retain two prints; remainder will be returned. Mark up
and retain one returned print as a Project Record Drawing.
D.
Coordination Drawings:
Coordination."
Comply with requirements in Section 01310
"Project Management and
E.
Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:
1.
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups.
2.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of
units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
3.
Samples for Verification: Submit full size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from the
same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically
identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture
variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of
manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of
repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and
components used for independent testing and inspection.
4.
Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of
qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match COTR's sample where so indicated. Attach label
on unexposed side that includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
5.
Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead,
provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
June 23, 2014
Generic description of Sample.
Product name or name of manufacturer.
Sample source.
Size limitations.
Compliance with recognized standards.
Availability.
Delivery time.
Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
01 33 00 5
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
a.
b.
If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product
represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate
limits of the variations.
Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate
workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and
similar construction characteristics.
7.
Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit one full set of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product
line. COTR will return submittal with options selected.
8.
Number of Samples for Verification: Submit three sets of Samples. COTR will retain one
Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project
Record Sample.
a.
9.
Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques,
connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality control
comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to
determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a.
b.
F.
Bid Documents
Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification
Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.
Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Government's
property, are the property of Contractor.
Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work
and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:
1.
2.
3.
Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.
Number and name of room or space.
Location within room or space.
G.
Delegated Design Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
H.
Submittals Schedule:
Documentation."
I.
Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
J.
Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
K.
Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion
of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design.
Include the following information in tabular form:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.
Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
June 23, 2014
01 33 00 6
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
1.
2.
3.
Bid Documents
Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. COTR will
not return copies.
Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity
responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer
or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
Test and Inspection Reports:
Comply with requirements in Section 01400
"Quality
Requirements."
B.
Contractor’s Construction Schedule:
Progress Documentation.”
C.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or
person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of
architects and owners, and other information specified.
D.
Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product
complies with requirements.
E.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with
requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification
Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
F.
Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer
complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.
G.
Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where
required.
H.
Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material
complies with requirements.
I.
Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements.
J.
Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for
compliance with performance requirements.
K.
Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of
product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
L.
Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard
form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or
after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements.
M.
Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer
complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency.
N.
Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the
following information:
June 23, 2014
Comply with requirements in Section 01320
01 33 00 7
“Construction
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Bid Documents
Name of evaluation organization.
Date of evaluation.
Time period when report is in effect.
Product and manufacturers' names.
Description of product.
Test procedures and results.
Limitations of use.
O.
Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal
maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Section 01770 "Closeout
Procedures."
P.
Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and
design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions
and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable.
Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
Q.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's
recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment.
Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the
following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
R.
Preparation of substrates.
Required substrate tolerances.
Sequence of installation or erection.
Required installation tolerances.
Required adjustments.
Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory authorized service
representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Name, address, and telephone number of factory authorized service representative making
report.
Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and,
if not, what corrective action was taken.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
S.
Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or
bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of
deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
T.
Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Government.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
June 23, 2014
01 33 00 8
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
A.
Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and
field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Government Representative.
B.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and
location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of
Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and
approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
GOVERNMENT REVIEWER’S ACTION
A.
General: Government Representative will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval
stamp and will return them without action.
B.
Action Submittals: Government Representative will review each submittal, make marks to indicate
corrections or modifications required, and return it. Government Representative will stamp each
submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.
1.
Submittal review stamp is as follows:
SUBMITTAL
REVIEW
Corrections or comments made on Submittals do not in any way relieve the Contractor
from complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. This review is solely for the
purpose of verifying general conformance with the design concept of the Project, and
general compliance with information given in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is
responsible for: Confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting
fabrication and installation processes, techniques, and sequences; coordinating his work
with that of other trades, and performing Work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
This Submission has been reviewed, with the following action taken:
[ ] NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN
[ ] MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED
[ ] REVISE AND RE SUBMIT
[ ]
Date: _______________________
_____________________________
REJECTED – SEE REMARKS
By:
A.F.E.T.A., CAMP PEARY, ENGINEERING BRANCH
C.
Definitions for action taken:
1.
NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN: Submittal was APPROVED as it was sent.
2.
MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED: Submittal was APPROVED WITH SOME CORRECTIONS, no
need to re submit.
3.
REVISE AND RE SUBMIT: MAKE CORRECTIONS to submittal and RE SUBMIT.
4.
REJECTED – SEE REMARKS – Submittal was entirely REJECTED and a new submittal needs
to be RE SUBMITED.
D.
Informational Submittals: Government Representative will review each submittal and will not return it, or
will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Government Representative will forward
each submittal to appropriate party.
E.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.
June 23, 2014
01 33 00 9
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
END OF SECTION 01 33 00
June 23, 2014
01 33 00 10
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract
Document requirements.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the
Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production
of standard products.
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality control
procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality control services required by COTR, Government,
or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
Section 01 320 "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required
tests and inspections.
Section 01731 "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by
testing and inspecting activities.
Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Quality Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution
of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies
with requirements.
B.
Quality Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution
of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not
include contract enforcement activities performed by COTR.
C.
Mockups: Full size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes, materials and other aspects of
the Work. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction,
coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Mockups establish the standard by which the
June 23, 2014
01 40 00 1
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
Work will be judged. Mockups may under some circumstances become part of the finished Work. Refer
to individual specifications sections for provisions regarding incorporation into the Work of mockups.
D.
1.4
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory
shall mean the same as testing agency.
DELEGATED DESIGN
A.
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design
professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and
systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1.
1.5
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written
request for additional information to the COTR.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the
inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B.
Delegated Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each
product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design
professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design
criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
C.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
Specification Section number and title.
Description of test and inspection.
Identification of applicable standards.
Identification of test and inspection methods.
Number of tests and inspections required.
Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
Requirements for obtaining samples.
Unique characteristics of each quality control service.
Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
June 23, 2014
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the
Contract Document requirements.
01 40 00 2
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
12.
13.
E.
1.6
Bid Documents
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Government's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments,
correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and
regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful in service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity
to produce required units.
B.
Factory Authorized Service Representative Qualifications:
An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's
products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
C.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in service performance.
D.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in service performance.
E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the
kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system,
assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
F.
Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be
performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1.
Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations governing
the Work, nor interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.
G.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and
inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests and
inspections to be performed.
H.
Preconstruction Testing: Testing agency shall perform preconstruction testing for compliance with
specified requirements for performance and test methods.
1.
Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a.
b.
c.
June 23, 2014
Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and
construction. Provide sizes and configurations of assemblies to adequately demonstrate
capability of product to comply with performance requirements.
Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results
to prevent delaying the Work.
Fabricate and install test assemblies using installers who will perform the same tasks for
Project.
01 40 00 3
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
d.
2.
I.
When testing is complete, remove assemblies; do not reuse materials on Project.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and
similar quality assurance service to COTR, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and
inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates
from the Contract Documents.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of
construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for
the completed Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.7
Bid Documents
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by COTR.
Notify COTR seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain COTR's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the
completed Work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Contractor Responsibilities:
having jurisdiction.
1.
Contractor to engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality control services.
a.
B.
Provide quality control services specified and required by authorities
Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by the Government, unless agreed to
in writing by the Government.
2.
Notify testing agencies and Government COTR at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work
that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.
3.
Where quality control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified
written report, in duplicate, of each quality control service.
4.
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are
Contractor's responsibility.
5.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when
they so direct.
Quality Assurance Tests and Inspections: The Contractor will engage a testing agency to conduct
special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction. Contractor will supply two
copies of all testing and inspection reports to COTR, or his designated representative within 24 hours.
Unsatisfactory reports will require Contractor to evaluate and fix any necessary items for new tests
and/or inspections until Government is satisfied with results. This additional time and cost will be
absorbed by the Contractor and at no additional cost or time delay to the Government
1.
June 23, 2014
Testing agency will notify The COTR or his representative and the Contractor promptly of
irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
01 40 00 4
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
2.
3.
4.
5.
Bid Documents
Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality
control service to the COTR or his designated representative, with copy to the Contractor and to
authorities having jurisdiction.
Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial
Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory authorized service representative to
inspect field assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report
results in writing.
D.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Provide quality control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract
Documents.
Any cost (including Engineer’s time for reinspection) associated with such
retesting/reinspecting shall be at Contractor expenses.
E.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with the COTR and the Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar
quality control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency
sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
Access to the Work.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting.
Assist agency in obtaining samples.
Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality assurance and
quality control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
H.
Notify the COTR and the Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from requirements.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality control
service through Contractor, with copy directly to COTR.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or
accept any portion of the Work.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality control
services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for
the Notice to Proceed.
June 23, 2014
01 40 00 5
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
1.
Bid Documents
Distribution: Distribute schedule to the COTR, testing agencies, and each party involved in
performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.
1.11 NOTIFICATION ON NON COMPLIANCE
A.
The contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected non compliance with the contract
requirements. The Contractor shall take immediate corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such
notice, when delivered to the Contractor at the work, shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of
notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the Contracting officer may issue and
order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the
time lost due to such stop orders shall be made to subject of claim for extension of time for excess costs
or damages by the Contractor.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged
construction and restore substrates and finishes.
B.
1.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of
these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a
manner that eliminates evidence of patching.
2.
Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for
quality control services.
END OF SECTION 01 40 00
June 23, 2014
01 40 00 6
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B.
"Approved": The term "approved," when used to convey COTR's action on Contractor's submittals,
applications, and requests, is limited to COTR's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of
the Contract.
C.
"Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and
"permitted" mean directed by COTR, requested by COTR, and similar phrases.
D.
"Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on Drawings or
to other paragraphs or schedules in Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract Documents.
Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the user locate the
reference.
E.
"Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by
authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction
industry that control performance of the Work.
F.
"Furnish": The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading,
unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
G.
"Install": The term "install" describes operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing,
unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H.
"Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I.
"Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee,
Subcontractor, or Sub subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including
installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
J.
The term "experienced," when used with an entity, means having successfully completed a minimum of
five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements
indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
June 23, 2014
Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be
performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as
"carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople
of the corresponding generic name.
01 42 00 1
REFERENCES
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
K.
"Project site" is the space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is
shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is
to be built.
L.
The term "Day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise
specifically defined.
1.3
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A.
Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,
applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly
into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract
Documents by reference.
B.
Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless
otherwise indicated.
C.
Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the
most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently
equal, to COTR for a decision before proceeding.
1.
D.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the
minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum
quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply
with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for
the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to COTR for a decision before proceeding.
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be familiar with industry
standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the
Contract Documents.
1.
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies
directly from publication source and make them available on request.
E.
Abbreviations and Acronyms for Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used
in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities
indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade &
Professional Associations of the U.S."
F.
Abbreviations and Acronyms for Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in
Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are
believed to be accurate and up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
BOCA
BOCA International, Inc.
www.bocai.org
CABO
Council of American Building Officials
(See ICC)
IAPMO
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (The) (909) 595 8449
www.iapmo.org
June 23, 2014
(708) 799 2300
01 42 00 2
REFERENCES
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
ICBO
International Conference of Building Officials
www.icbo.org
(800) 284 4406
(562) 699 0541
ICC
International Code Council
(Formerly: CABO Council of American Building Officials)
www.intlcode.org
(703) 931 4533
SBCCI
Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.
www.sbcci.org
(205) 591 1853
G.
Abbreviations and Acronyms for Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms
are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the
entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change
and are believed to be accurate and up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CE
Army Corps of Engineers
CRD Standards
(601) 634 2355
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations
www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr
(202) 512 1800
CPSC
Consumer Product Safety Commission
www.cpsc.gov
(800) 638 2772
(301) 504 0990
DOC
Department of Commerce
www.doc.gov
(202) 482 2000
DOD
Department of Defense
DOD Specifications and Standards
//astimage.daps.dla.mil/online
(215) 697 6257
EPA
Environmental Protection Agency
www.epa.gov
(202) 260 2090
FAA
Federal Aviation Administration
Department of Transportation
www.faa.gov
(202) 366 4000
FCC
Federal Communications Commission
www.fcc.gov
(202) 418 0190
FDA
Food and Drug Administration
www.fda.gov
(888) 463 6332
June 23, 2014
01 42 00 3
REFERENCES
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
FED STD
Federal Standard
(See FS)
FS
Federal Specification
(Available from DOD, GSA, and NIBS)
FTMS
Federal Test Method Standard
(See FS)
GSA
General Services Administration
www.gsa.gov
(202) 708 5082
(202) 619 8925
(Federal
Specifications)
HUD
Department of Housing and Urban Development
www.hud.gov
(202) 401 0388
LBL
Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory
(See LBNL)
LBNL
Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory
www.lbl.gov
MILSPEC
Military Specification and Standards
(See DOD)
NCHRP
National Cooperative Highway Research Program
(See TRB)
NIST
National Institute of Standards and Technology
www.nist.gov
(301) 975 2000
OSHA
Occupational Safety & Health Administration
(See CFR 29)
www.osha.gov
(202) 219 5000
RUS
Rural Utilities Service
(See USDA)
(202) 720 9540
TRB
Transportation Research Board
www.nas.edu/trb
(202) 334 2933
USDA
Department of Agriculture
www.usda.gov
(202) 720 8732
USPS
Postal Service
www.usps.gov
(202) 268 2000
(510) 486 5605
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)
June 23, 2014
01 42 00 4
REFERENCES
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
END OF SECTION 01 42 00
June 23, 2014
01 42 00 5
REFERENCES
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities,
support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
B.
Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
D.
Sewers and drainage.
Water service and distribution.
Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water facilities.
Heating and cooling facilities.
Ventilation.
Electric power service.
Lighting.
Telephone service.
Temporary roads and paving.
Dewatering facilities and drains.
Project identification and temporary signs.
Waste disposal facilities.
Field offices.
Storage and fabrication sheds.
Lifts and hoists.
Temporary elevator usage.
Temporary stairs.
Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
June 23, 2014
Environmental protection.
Stormwater control.
Tree and plant protection.
Pest control.
Site enclosure fence.
Security enclosure and lockup.
Barricades, warning signs, and lights.
Covered walkways.
Temporary enclosures.
Temporary partitions.
Fire protection.
01 50 00 1
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Building 1100 Café
E.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Bid Documents
Section 01330 "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation
and termination schedule and utility reports.
Section 01700 "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.
Division 2 Section "Termite Control" for pest control.
Division 2 Section "Hot Mix Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt paving
for temporary roads and paved areas.
Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for construction and maintenance of cement
concrete pavement for temporary roads and paved areas.
Divisions 2 through 16 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in
those Sections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Permanent Enclosure: As determined by COTR, permanent or temporary roofing is complete,
insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed
with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
USE CHARGES
A.
General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Government or the
Architect and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and
facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Government's construction forces.
Occupants of Project.
Architect.
Testing agencies.
Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Sewer Service: Use Government’s existing sewer system without metering and without payment of use
charges.
C.
Water Service: Use water from Government’s existing water system without metering and without
payment of use charges.
D.
Electric Power Service: Use electric power from Government’s existing system without metering and
without payment of use charges.
E.
Telephone Service: Contractor is to advise the COTR as to the number of phone lines required for the
project. The COTR will put the Contractor in touch with AFETA’s Point of Contact at Verizon for
installation of required lines. Once Verizon has installed the lines to a certain point on Base, AFETA will
activate the lines to the construction site. The Contractor will receive billing at their business address for
all charges associated with the use of the lines. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to terminate
service upon completion of the construction project.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures
performed on temporary utilities.
June 23, 2014
01 50 00 2
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Building 1100 Café
B.
1.6
Bid Documents
Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for submittal of
Contractor's Construction Schedule, submit a schedule indicating implementation and termination of
each temporary utility. Clearly note anticipated times when existing utility services will be interrupted for
connections of temporary services. Provide written notification to COTR at least 72 hours in advance of
proposed utility interruption.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241.
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.7
Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities
are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
Erosion Control: As required by the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Manual by the Virginia
Department of Conservation and Recreation.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary
utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the Government, change over from
use of temporary service to use of permanent service.
1.
B.
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use
as a construction facility before the Government's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all
parties engaged in the Work:
1.
2.
Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat.
Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may
be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended.
B.
Pavement: Comply with Division 2 pavement Sections.
C.
Construction Fencing: Provide orange plastic mesh type fencing, minimum 4 feet high. Secure with
metal uprights at maximum 8 feet on center.
D.
Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry”.
E.
Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths; regular type
panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36.
June 23, 2014
01 50 00 3
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
F.
Insulation: Unfaced mineral fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with
maximum flame spread and smoke developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively.
G.
Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting."
H.
Tarpaulins: Fire resistive labeled with flame spread rating of 15 or less.
I.
Water: Potable.
2.2
EQUIPMENT
A.
General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended.
B.
Field Offices: Prefabricated Mobile units with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable
finishes; heated and air conditioned; on foundations adequate for normal loading.
C.
Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as
indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA recommended classes for exposures.
1.
Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by
location and class of fire exposure.
D.
Self Contained Toilet Units: Single occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion
type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass fiber reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent
material.
E.
Drinking Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap dispenser, bottled water drinking water units, including
paper cup supply.
1.
F.
Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water
temperature at 45 to 55 deg F.
Heating Equipment: Unless the Government authorizes the use of a permanent heating system,
provide vented, self contained, liquid propane gas or fuel oil heaters with individual space thermostatic
control.
1.
2.
Use of gasoline burning space heaters, open flame heaters, or salamander type heating units is
prohibited.
Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed.
G.
Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110 to 120 V
plugs into higher voltage outlets; equipped with ground fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot
light.
H.
Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance,
wiring circuits, not exceeding 125 V ac, 20 A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed
cable.
2.3
LIFE SAFETY
A.
Emergencies – In case of emergencies, either Dial 611 on a Base telephone, or request escort to notify
emergency services.
June 23, 2014
01 50 00 4
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
B.
Hot Work – A Base permit is required for all work requiring an open flame. Contact Base Fire
Department for each day (extension 2223).
C.
Road Closings – Contractor must notify the COTR at least 48 hours prior to any road closings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with
performance of the Work and with normal Base operations. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do
not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed
permanent facilities.
3.2
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Unless otherwise noted, engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service
or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the
remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment.
Comply with utility company
recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for marking of all utilities. The Base owns most of the utilities
so a Utility Service Locator will charge for service. The Base will provide a courtesy check on
marked utilities.
Arrange with the utility company, the Government, and existing users for time when service can
be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. Provide a minimum of
72 hours written advance notice to the COTR for each interruption.
Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available,
provide trucked in services.
Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that
can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches, dry
wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully
used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off site in a lawful
manner.
1.
2.
3.
Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants that might
clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge.
Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After heavy use,
restore normal conditions promptly.
Provide temporary filter beds, settlement tanks, separators, and similar devices to purify effluent
to levels acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before use.
D.
Water Service: Use of the Government's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as
facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to the Government. At Substantial
Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
1.
Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site.
June 23, 2014
01 50 00 5
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Building 1100 Café
2.
3.
E.
Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan
of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans.
Provide minimum 72 hours written notice to the COTR of planned water service interruptions.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water fixtures. Comply with
regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and
facilities.
1.
Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable
materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for
disposal of used material.
2.
Toilets: Install self contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy.
3.
Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for
personnel who handle materials that require wash up. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply
cleaning compounds appropriate for each type of material handled.
a.
4.
F.
Bid Documents
Provide safety showers, eyewash fountains, and similar facilities for convenience, safety,
and sanitation of personnel.
Drinking Water Facilities: Provide bottled water, drinking water units.
Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for
curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of
low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful
effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
1.
Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F in permanently enclosed portions of building for
normal construction activities, and 65 deg F for finishing activities and areas where finished Work
has been installed.
G.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for
curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of
high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed
installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient
condition required and minimize energy consumption.
H.
Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system
of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters,
transformers, overload protected disconnecting means, automatic ground fault interrupters, and main
distribution switchgear.
1.
2.
Install power distribution wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage.
Connect temporary service to Government's existing power source, as directed by COTR.
I.
Electric Power Service: Use of the Government's existing electric power service will be permitted, as
long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to the Government.
J.
Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment.
1.
2.
June 23, 2014
Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if single
lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe
length voltage ratio.
Provide warning signs at power outlets other than 110 to 120 V.
01 50 00 6
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Building 1100 Café
3.
4.
5.
K.
Provide metal conduit, tubing, or metallic cable for wiring exposed to possible damage. Provide
rigid steel conduits for wiring exposed on grades, floors, decks, or other traffic areas.
Provide metal conduit enclosures or boxes for wiring devices.
Provide 4 gang outlets, spaced so 100 foot extension cord can reach each area for power hand
tools and task lighting. Provide a separate 125 V ac, 20 A circuit for each outlet.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations and traffic conditions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
L.
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without
operating entire system.
Provide one 100 W incandescent lamp per 500 sq. ft., uniformly distributed, for general lighting,
or equivalent illumination.
Provide one 100 W incandescent lamp every 50 feet in traffic areas.
Provide one 100 W incandescent lamp per story in stairways and ladder runs, located to
illuminate each landing and flight.
Install exterior yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations,
traffic conditions, and signage visibility when the Work is being performed.
Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common
use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install separate telephone line for
each field office and first aid station.
1.
Government will make final connection to Base telephone system, from lines run by Contractor.
2.
At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
4.
3.3
Bid Documents
Police and fire departments.
Ambulance service.
Contractor's home office.
Architect's office.
Engineers' offices.
Government's office.
Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
Provide an answering machine on superintendent's telephone.
Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use in making and receiving telephone
calls when away from field office.
a.
Use of cellular or Nextel phones is permitted on the Base, except they may not be used
inside any portion of Government occupied buildings.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and
support facilities for easy access.
Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area
or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.
Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to the Government.
Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas
adequate to support loads and to withstand exposure to traffic during construction period. Locate
June 23, 2014
01 50 00 7
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Extend
temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction
operations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved
areas.
Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according
to Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading,
proofrolling, compacting, and testing.
Delay installation of final course of permanent hot mix asphalt pavement until immediately before
Substantial Completion. Repair hot mix asphalt base course pavement before installation of final
course according to Division 2 Section "Hot Mix Asphalt Paving."
C.
Traffic Controls: Provide temporary traffic controls at junction of temporary roads with public roads.
Include warning signs for public traffic and "STOP" signs for entrance onto public roads. Comply with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections for
temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction
activities included in individual Sections. Where feasible, use same facilities. Maintain Project site,
excavations, and construction free of water.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining property
nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide temporary
drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed.
Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from
construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste
materials separately from other waste. Comply with Section 01700 "Execution Requirements" for
progress cleaning requirements.
1.
2.
If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each
type of waste material to be deposited.
Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of waste
materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide detailed information
for on site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. Provide information on
destination of each type of waste material and means to be used to dispose of all waste
materials.
F.
Common Use Field Office: Provide an insulated, weathertight, heated and air conditioned field office for
use as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to
accommodate required office personnel and meetings of 10 persons at Project site. Keep office clean
and orderly.
G.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services. Sheds may be open shelters or
fully enclosed spaces within building or elsewhere within the area of work.
1.
H.
Paint exposed lumber and plywood with exterior grade acrylic latex emulsion over exterior primer.
Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and personnel. Truck cranes and similar
devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.
June 23, 2014
01 50 00 8
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Building 1100 Café
I.
3.4
Bid Documents
Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not
adequate. Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so
finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance.
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in
ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air,
waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and
equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that
will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site.
B.
Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and
subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.
C.
Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees
to protect vegetation from construction damage. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and
erosion.
D.
Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a local exterminator or pest
control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and
other pests. Engage this pest control service to perform extermination and control procedures at
regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform
control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
1.
E.
Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, provide an 4 foot high orange plastic site
enclosure. Locate where indicated, or enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to
accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, beavers, and
other animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.
1.
2.
F.
Treat any standing water with larvacide to control growth of mosquitoes and other insects.
Set fence posts in compacted mixture of gravel and earth.
Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and other
construction operations.
Guard Booth: The Government will deliver to the site a prefabricated Guard Booth, and place it where
indicated, or if not indicated, adjacent to the site entrance. The Contractor will connect power and other
utilities prior to start of construction activities.
1.
2.
3.
Provide temporary foundation and electrical and telephone service to the guard booth.
The guard booth will remain the property of the Government.
Relocate the guard booth as directed by the Government at the completion of construction, or
when it is no longer required.
G.
Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed
areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft,
and similar violations of security.
H.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting
structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform
personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including
flashing red or amber lights.
June 23, 2014
01 50 00 9
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Building 1100 Café
1.
I.
For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8 inch thick exterior
plywood.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and
completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide
temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
J.
Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated
temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing
requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
Vertical Openings: Close openings of 25 sq. ft. or less with plywood or similar materials.
Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load
bearing, wood framed construction.
Install tarpaulins securely using fire retardant treated wood framing and other materials.
Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 sq. ft. in area, use fire retardant
treated material for framing and main sheathing.
Where utility and other excavations in roads will remain open for more than 24 hours, provide
steel plates which would permit the passage of emergency vehicles.
Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and
maintain temporary fire protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable
and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241 and other applicable codes.
1.
Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from
space being served, with sign mounted above.
a.
b.
Type: Class ABC dry chemical extinguishers.
Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose;
provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell.
2.
Store combustible materials in containers in fire safe locations.
3.
Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection
facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire
exposure areas.
4.
Supervise welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of
fire ignition. Secure a Hot Work permit as directed in the Life Safety section of this section.
a.
3.5
Bid Documents
Employ fire retardant blankets for indoor welding operations.
5.
Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation
of permanent fire protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and
use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.
6.
Develop and supervise an overall fire prevention and first aid fire protection program for
personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit
availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
June 23, 2014
01 50 00 10
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Building 1100 Café
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
1.
2.
Protect from damage
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and
similar facilities on a 24 hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid
possibility of damage.
Prevent water filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from
damage during excavation operations.
a.
C.
Bid Documents
Repair or replace to COTR’s satisfaction any underground utilities damaged due to
construction activities.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when
it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion.
Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of
interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace
construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor.
a.
Exception: Existing Government furnished prefabricated guard booth shall remain the
property of the Government. Upon Final Completion of project, disconnect utility services
and Government will remove booth from project site.
2.
Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving.
Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not
comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt
and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant
materials or lawns. Replace topsoil to a depth to match that removed, and provide erosion mats
prior to landscaping. Coordinate with provisions of Division Two, if any. Repair or replace street
paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by the Government.
3.
At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction
period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01 50 00
June 23, 2014
01 50 00 11
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 01 56 00 – ENVIRONMENTAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work covered by this Section consists of performing all work required for the prevention of
environmental pollution on Armed Forces Experimental Training Activity (AFETA) Camp Peary during,
and as a result of, construction operations except for those measures set forth in other Technical
Provisions of these specifications. The control of environmental pollution requires consideration of the
effects of activities of the Contractor on air, water, and land resources.
B. All site rules, established by the project manager, but not included in this policy, shall be strictly adhered
to in order to ensure that AFETA Camp Peary operations are not interrupted and its environmental
compliance is not negatively affected.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The contractor and his subcontractors shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and Local laws and
regulations concerning environmental pollution control and protection, as well as the specific
requirements stated elsewhere in this Standards Manual and awarded contract documents. Additionally,
the Contractor and his Subcontractors shall comply with any and all Federal Acquisition Regulations
(FAR) cited in the awarded contract documentation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal requirements for this section will be divided into two submittal types: periodic and close out. All
submittals shall be made to the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR). Examples of
submittals that may be required for project include, but are not limited to:
B. Contract shall provide legible weight receipts for solid waste disposed of and materials recycled bearing
the name, address, and phone number of the receiving facilities for every load of material delivered. The
weight ticket shall include the name, address and phone number of the contractor along with the type of
material, weight of the material in pounds, the date of the transaction, and a signature from a
representative of the receiving facility. Receipts shall be submitted to the COTR with monthly payment
invoices.
C. Proposed pesticides to be used during the course of the project not on the AFETA Camp Peary approved
pesticide list. These pesticides will require approval by AFETA Camp Peary before application. (Submit
prior to pesticide application activity).
D. Copies of valid pesticide applicator certifications for individuals applying pesticides during the project.
F. Pesticide usage report (submitted within seven (7) days of pesticide application), including, at a minimum:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Name, address, and phone number of contractor;
Name of the applicator;
Building, facility, or area treated;
Target pest(s) to be controlled;
Pesticide Name and EPA Number;
Active Ingredient Applied in pounds;
Date of application;
Certification of proper pesticide disposal.
June 23, 2014
01 56 00 1
ENVIRONMENTAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
G. Certification of compliance with executive order 13101 Greening the Government through Waste
Prevention, Recycling, and Federal Acquisition; appendix B. (Project close out).
H. Waste Disposal Summary Table; Appendix C. (Project close out).
I.
Hazardous Material Summary Log. (Annually and Project close out).
J.
Asbestos removal receipts designating both friable and non friable asbestos removed from locations
throughout AFETA Camp Peary. The removal receipts shall identify at a minimum: name, address and
phone number of the removal contractor, as well as the disposal receiving facility. Additionally, the
receipts shall clearly identify the specific location where the asbestos was removed, the contract number,
and the amount removed/disposed of in either tons or cubic yards. (Submit monthly with invoices).
1.4 PROJECT RECORDS
A. Project records required by the project shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements outlined in
the contract documentation. Some project records that may be required include but are not limited to the
following:
1. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)
For projects with land disturbance of one acre or greater, the contractor must maintain the SWPPP on
site, including all required erosion and sediment control inspections and maintenance records, and
make the SWPP available for inspection by the COTR upon request.
2. Environmental Permits – General
Contractor is responsible for maintaining copies of all environmental permits relating to the project
site and complying with all provisions contained therein whether the permits were secured by the
Contractor or AFETA Camp Peary.
3. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
Contractor is responsible for maintaining a repository for all MSDS at the project site and making
them available to all workers who may come in contact with any of the material kept thereon. The
contractor shall make for inspection by the COTR or AFETA Camp Peary Officer any and all MSDS
when requested.
4. Worker Health and Safety Plan
Contractor is responsible for the development and implementation of an Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA) and Department of Defense (DoD) compliant worker health and safety
plan prior to commencing work on any project. The Contractor must make the worker health and
safety plan available for inspection by the COTR or AFETA Camp Peary Officer upon request.
5. Waste Disposal Receipts
The Contractor shall maintain a copy of all receipts, bill of landing, etc. including copies of initial EPA
Form 8700 22, Uniformed Waste Manifest and subsequent copies signed by receiving Treatment,
Storage, and Disposal Facility (TSDF) for all waste generated during the project including demolition
debris, soil, and general C&D waste. The contractor shall make the receipts available to the COTR
upon request.
1.5 NOTICE OF NON COMPLIANCE
A. Upon receipt of written notification of noncompliance from the Contracting Officer or the COTR, the
Contractor shall immediately take corrective action as directed by the Contracting Officer or COTR. If the
Contractor fails to comply promptly, the Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the
work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. All costs associated with the correction and
suspension of work shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor.
June 23, 2014
01 56 00 2
ENVIRONMENTAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
1.6 SUBCONTRACTOR
A. The requirements of the specifications shall be included in any subcontract written under this contract.
Compliance with the provisions of the specifications by subcontractors shall be responsibility of the
Contractor.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL PERMITS AND CERTIFICATIONS
A. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining and/or complying with all applicable environmental permits
and certifications necessary to accomplish all work after review and approval by the Contracting Officer or
COTR. Permits that may be required include, but are not limited to, wetlands disturbance permits
(Section 401 and 404 of the Clean Water Act), storm water discharge permits (VPDES), Department of
Environmental Quality (DEQ) / Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Asbestos Removal Notifications,
National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA) document and other project permits and waste transporter
identification required under EPA’s Resource, Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA).
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL FINES AND PENALTIES
A. The contractor agrees to indemnify the Government, its officers, agents, and employees against liability
and costs associated with the intentional or negligent noncompliance of environmental laws, regulations,
or requirements by the Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, or subcontractors to the extend such
noncompliance arises out of the manufacture or delivery of supplies, services or construction by or for the
account of the Government.
1.9 DEFINITIONS
A. Hazardous Material (HAZMAT): Any substance defined by OSHA as a hazardous substance requiring a
MSDS. Additionally, a hazardous substance is any substance listed in 40 CFR Table 302.4 that when
released into the environment above a certain amount, must be reported and, depending upon threat to
the environment may require federal involvement when authorized.
B. Solid Waste: Any material, liquid, gaseous, or solid, that is deemed as waste because it is no longer
needed, is excess, has exceeded its shell life, is spill residue, has been abandoned, or is no longer
usable for its intended purpose. Solid waste, as defined by federal and state regulations, includes, but is
not limited to: chemicals, contaminated clothing, empty containers, garbage, packaging, construction and
demolition debris, refuse, and all other discarded materials that are generated during construction,
residential, and commercial activities. A material becomes a solid waste when it is discarded.
C. Materials are also solid wastes if they are used, reused, or reclaimed, or accumulated, stored or treated
before such use, reuse, or reclamation, when they are regulated as hazardous wastes under the Virginia
Hazardous Waste Management Regulations (9 VAC 20 60 10 et seq.); or used in a manner constituting
disposal by being:
1. Applied to or placed on the land; or
2. Used to produce products that are applied to or placed on the land or are otherwise contained in
products that are applied to or placed on the land. In the latter case, the product so containing
remains a solid waste; or
3. Burned to recover energy, used to produce fuel, or are contained in fuels. In this case, the fuel so
containing remains a solid waste; or
4. Reclaimed; or
5. Accumulated speculatively (see “speculatively accumulated materials” in 9 VAC 20 80 10).
June 23, 2014
01 56 00 3
ENVIRONMENTAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
a. Hazardous Chemical: any Chemical that has a physical or health hazard as defined in OSHA
29 CFR1910.1200( c ).
b. Hazardous Waste (HW) – A solid waste, or combination of solid wastes, which because of its
quantity, concentration, or physical, chemical or infectious characteristics may cause, or
significantly contribute to an increase in serious irreversible, or incapacitating reversible,
illness; or pose a substantial present or potential hazard to human health or the environment
when improperly treated, stored, transported, or disposed of, or otherwise managed. (RCRA:
42 USC 6903).
c.
Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) are a group of organic chemicals that can be odorless or
mildly solids or oily liquids. They were formerly used in the USA as hydraulic fluids,
plasticizers, adhesives, fire retardants, way extenders, dedusting agents, pesticide extenders,
inks, lubricants, cutting oils, in heat transfer systems, carbonless reproducing paper.
d. Construction and Demolition (C&B) Debris consists of the waste generated during
construction, renovation and demolition projects. Covering a wide array of materials including
wood, concrete, steel, brick and gypsum, C&D debris is a large and complex waste stream.
e. Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM) – Any material containing more than one percent
asbestos by weight. (TSCA: 15 USC PL 100 577, TSCA: 15 USC 2642).
f.
Lead based Paint (LBP) – Paint or other surface coatings that contain lead in excess of 1.0
milligrams per centimeter squared or 0.5 percent by weight (40 CFR 745.103, 745.223) or
1. In the case of paint or other surface coatings on target housing, such lower level as may
be established by the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development, as defined in section
302( c ) of the Lead Based Paint Poisoning Prevention Act, or
2. In the case of any other paint or surface coatings, such other level as may be established
by the Administrator. (TSCA: 15 USC 2682).
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Open Burning
The Contractor is prohibited from open burning on AFETA Camp Peary.
B. Vehicle Emissions
Not Applicable
C. Historical and Archeological Findings
If the Contractor believes he or she has discovered any item or area of historical or archaeological
interest not specified in the contract during the completing of work, the Contractor shall leave the area
undisturbed and immediately report the finding to the COTR.
D. Unexpected Materials
E. Asbestos Containing Material (ACM): If the Contractor believes they have discovered any ACM not
specified in the contract during the execution of work the Contractor shall stop work on the site
immediately and notify the COTR.
June 23, 2014
01 56 00 4
ENVIRONMENTAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
F. Lead based Paint (LBP): If the Contractor believes they have discovered LBP not specified in the
contract during the execution of work, the Contractor shall stop work on the site immediately and notify
the COTR.
G. Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs): If the Contractor believes they have discovered a PCB containing
item not specified in the contract during the execution of work, the Contractor shall stop work on the site
immediately and notify the COTR. The Contractor shall not use or install any equipment containing PCBs
on AFETA Camp Peary.
3.2 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. The Contractor is authorized to generate solid waste, but is responsible for proper offsite disposal of all
solid waste generated during the life of the project in accordance with this section.
B. References
1. AFETA Camp Peary Waste Management Plan (December 2002 or Current)
2. Executive Order 13101 Greening of the Government Through Waste Prevention, Recycling and
Federal Acquisition (14 Sep 1998)
3. Executive Order 13148
4. State and local SW regulations and requirements
5. DoD Pollution Prevention requirements
C. Management of Solid Waste
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for collecting all solid waste generated during the life of the
project. The Contractor collect all solid wastes generated during the performance of the contract in a
container/area provided by the Contractor and approved by the COTR. All Construction and
Demolition debris (C&D) is to be recycled at a permitted C&D recycling facility to the maximum extent
practicable. The Contractor shall segregate recyclable wastes (i.e. copper piping, asphalt,
fluorescent lights, ballasts, concrete, lumber, plastics, ceiling tiles, all crap metal, etc.) in a cost
effective manner to maximum extend practicable. Non recyclable solid waste generated under the
scope of this contract is to be taken to an approved and permitted solid waste landfill. The Contractor
is prohibited from using base dumpsters or other waste receptacles for the disposal of any solid
wastes. All solid wastes shall be reclaimed, recycled, or disposed of prior to completion of work on
AFETA Camp Peary.
2. The Contractor must notify the COTR of his intention to remove soils from a project site to an Off
Base location at least two business days prior to the removal of the soil. The COTR will conduct
sampling of the soil to be taken off Base and will provide the results to the Contractor within 48 hours
of the sampling effort.
3. The Contractor must notify the COTR of his intention to initiate demolition activities at least 2
business days prior to the commencement of the demolition activities to allow the COTR time to
perform lead waste clearance sampling. Sampling results will be provided to the Contractor by the
COTR within 48 hours of the sampling taking place. No demolition may occur without clearance
sampling being performed.
3.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS (HAZMAT) MANAGEMENT
A. The Contractor is authorized to use hazardous materials under the scope of this contract in accordance
with this section.
B. References
1. AFETA Camp Peary Integrated Contingency Plan (May 2003 or current)
2. AFETA Camp Peary Waste Management Plan (December 2002 or current)
June 23, 2014
01 56 00 5
ENVIRONMENTAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
3. Executive Order 13148
4. Emergency Planning and Community Right to know Act (EPCRA)
5. OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1200( c )
C. HAZMAT
1.
The Contractor shall participate in the AFETA Camp Peary HAZMAT program to the extent described
in the contract. Participation shall include:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Designation of a single individual who has experience and knowledge of HAZMAT issues;
Copies of MSDSs for all HAZMATs to be used or stored on base;
Limited storage of all HAZMATs on AFETA Camp Peary;
Inventory of all HAZMAT that is used during the duration of the project, including documentation
for proper disposal and/or removal at end of the project;
e. Implementation of Best Management Practices (BMPs) to prevent spills and other releases to the
environment to meet NFPA, OSHA, and RCRA requirements.
D. MSDS
1. The Contractor shall maintain a current MSDS at the AFETA Camp Peary project site for each
HAZMAT at the site where the HAZMAT is being stored or used, and shall make the MSDSs
available for inspection upon request from the COTR.
E. Tracking Usage of HAZMATs
1. Contractor shall maintain a daily inventory and usage log for each HAZMAT authorized and used on
the project. A sample inventory and usage log will be provided at the preconstruction meeting. The
inventory and usage log shall be made available to the COTR upon request. A copy of the usage log
must be submitted to the COTR at the project close out.
2. The usage log shall indicate the name of the material, the date used and the quantity used in units of
measurement consistent with the volume units identified on the container (i.e. if the container is
marked in ounces, the usage log shall indicate usage in ounces). The log shall also include dates of
spillage or waste amount (when applicable).
F. HAZMAT Storage
1. The Contractor shall store all HAZMAT in a designated HAZMAT storage area. The Contractor shall
anticipate receiving at least one HAZMAT storage area inspection during the contract period to
ensure their HAZMAT storage area is in compliance with HAZMAT storage requirements outlined in
this section.
2. The Contractor shall ensure that all Best Management Practices in paragraph 3.3.6 of this area are in
place while HAZMATs are being used or stored at AFETA Camp Peary.
3. Storage of open or unidentified, drums if forbidden within AFETA Camp Peary Premises.
4. All non hazardous wastes composed of buildings materials, pipes, empty drums, ducts, equipment,
trees and brush, etc., generated at the project for outside disposal, shall be placed in areas
designated by the AFETA Camp Peary Project Manager. These materials must be removed from
AFETA Camp Peary premises within 30 days or at the completion of the project, whichever comes
first, and must be disposed at a permitted facility. Contractor must provide trash dumpsters or
containers to collect waste debris. Under no circumstances will contractors be allowed to form waste
piles on base. Prior to removing empty drums from the site, any AFETA Camp Peary identification or
labels must be removed, and/or erased.
June 23, 2014
01 56 00 6
ENVIRONMENTAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
5. Any non hazardous waste generated by the Contractor at AFETA Camp Peary shall be disposed of
by AFETA Camp Peary at the Contractor’s expense. However, whenever the Contractor
demonstrates its capability to handle and dispose of these hazardous wastes, (following the
applicable regulatory requirements), he can proceed with the corresponding disposal operation. The
AFETA Camp Peary Project Manager, and Environmental Manager must be consulted on a case by
case basis on this issue. The AFETA Camp Peary Environmental Manager must review, approve,
and sign off on all documentation related to hazardous waste disposal generated on the facility.
G. HAZMAT Best Management Practices (BMPs)
1. NFPA and OSHA required or specified flammable material or corrosive material storage lockers shall
be used for the storage of all HAZMATs.
2. The Contractor shall ensure that the segregation of incompatible materials is accomplished at all
times in his or her field office, storage, staging, and work areas.
3. Ensure the use of protective measures such as drop clothes and tarpaulins when using HAZMATs to
keep the work and storage areas free from drips and spills.
4. Keep all containers closed when not in use. At the end of the workday, or when finished using any
material, return the container to a proper storage area.
5. The Contractor shall provide secondary containment for all HAZMAT being stored and used at
AFETA Camp Peary. Secondary containment shall be chemically inert to the HAZMAT being stored
and impervious to absorption of the HAZMAT. The containment volume shall not be less than 10% of
the total quantity being stored or the equal quantity of the largest container being stored whichever is
greater in volume. Separate secondary containment shall be provided for incompatible HAZMATs.
6. Do NOT store HAZMAT outdoors where it can be exposed to precipitation.
7. Follow all manufacturer’s recommendations for storage and use of HAZMATs.
8. MSDSs for each HAZMAT being used are required by OSHA to be available onsite to employees and
to the COTR or AFETA Camp Peary Safety Officer. The Contractor shall have current copies
available at all times where employees can access them in case of emergency.
3.4 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION
A. The Contractor is authorized to perform land disturbance activities and exterior facility work under the
scope of this project. The project may require a Virginia Pollutant Discharge Elimination Standard
(VPDES) general permit for storm water discharges from construction activities if the total land
disturbance exceeds one acre (43,560 square feet).
B. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan – Not required if the total disturbed area is less than 1.0 acre.
C. Co mingling Discharges
1. No fuels, oils, acids, wastes, or other materials shall be permitted to be discharged from the
construction site with storm water.
D. AFETA Camp Peary Storm Drains
1. The Contractor is prohibited from pouring ANY material down a storm drain. Exceptions to this
requirement may be granted by the COTR after a written request if the requested discharge is
allowable under AFETA Camp Peary permitting requirements.
E. Unanticipated Environmental Conditions
June 23, 2014
01 56 00 7
ENVIRONMENTAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
1. The Contractor believes he/she has encountered federally protected species, floodplains or wetlands
not specified in the contract during the execution of work, the Contractor shall stop work on the site
immediately and notify the COTR.
3.5 PETROLEUM, OIL LUBRICANT (POL) STORAGE
A. Storage
1. The Contractor shall not store any quantity of petroleum, oil or lubricants (POL) in tanks or bladders
larger than 55 gallons without government approval. Fuel storage tanks brought by contractors on
site must be provided with secondary containment. Sufficient freeboard shall be incorporated to
ensure the containment will hold the complete contents of the tank plus ten percent plus 6” of rainfall.
B. Inspections
1. Inspection and draining of any accumulated water shall be conducted at least once a week or after
rainfall events. Storm water drained off the secondary containment must be inspected and monitored
before draining out of the containment. If POL is present, the water must be disposed of in
accordance with the AFETA Camp Peary’s hazardous waste requirements and cannot be discharged
to the environment.
C. Equipment Fueling
1. The Contractor shall perform all equipment/machinery fuel and/or oil loading operation in a safe
manner, in order to avoid any spillage incidents, risk of injury to any person or property damage. The
Contractor shall provide and use the necessary spill containment/clean up material and equipment,
whenever performing a fuel lading operation within AFETA Camp Peary’s premises.
D. Vehicle Maintenance
1. The Contractor shall not carry out any maintenance activity on his construction equipment/machinery
at AFETA Camp Peary, unless such activities are permitted by the project manager, and carried out
following adequate material handling practices and using adequate spill control equipment and
materials. Maintenance (oil changes, washes, etc.) of contractor’s vehicle will not be permitted with
AFETA Camp Peary’s premises.
E. Equipment Condition
1. The Contractor shall not use any equipment that is leaking fuel and/or oil. Any fuel and/or oil leaking
arising from leaking equipment located on site shall be controlled and cleared up as necessary. Such
leaking equipment must be reported to the project manager and taken off site immediately when they
are found leaking.
3.6 SPILL CONTROL AND CLEAN UP
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cleanup and disposal of all spill POL products. This includes
all materials used to contain and absorb the spill. The Contractor shall maintain a stock of spill cleanup
material, e.g. absorbent material, on hand at all locations where fuel or petroleum products are stored and
transferred. The Contractor's stock of spill cleanup materials shall be adequate to clean up the total
amount of products being stored by the Contractor or the total amount being transferred by the
Contractor. Spills of POL products shall be managed in accordance with the current Waste Management
Plan and Integrated Contingency Plan for AFETA Camp Peary. In case a spill occurs, contact the COTR
immediately and the AFETA Camp Peary Environmental and Safety Managers to evaluate the incident
and for guidance on steps to be followed. Disposal of wastes generated from spill cleanup shall be the
contractor’s responsibility and be in accordance with paragraph 3.3 of this section.
June 23, 2014
01 56 00 8
ENVIRONMENTAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
3.7 The Government requires the use of recycle content and recovered materials and products identified in the
EPA’s Comprehensive Procurement Guideline CPG. All materials and products intended for use within this
project must meet the recommended minimum content standards identified in the current CPG and
Recovered Materials Advisory Notices (RMANs). If a conflict exists between material specifications
elsewhere and affirmative procurement requirements, the Contractor shall immediately notify the COTR.
A. References
1. Executive order 13101 Greening of the Government Through Waste Prevention, Recycling, and
Federal Acquisition (14 Sep 1998).
2. U.S. EPA’s CPG & RMANs EPA’s Comprehensive Procurement Guideline and Federal Register
Recovered Materials Advisory Notices. (Currently located a http:/www.epa.gov)
B. The Contractor shall provide a written Certification of Compliance with Executive Order 13101. The
certificate shall be signed by the Contractor and shall have the following:
1. The following certification statement: “I certify that products and materials used on AFETA Camp
Peary Project Number <Insert Project Number> comply with recommended minimum content
standards for recycled materials outlined in Execution Order 13101. Construction Materials used on
this project contain minimum recycled content outlined in the most current Comprehensive
Procurement Guidelines and Recovered Material Advisory Notices”.
2. Itemized list of the construction materials and products used for the contract covered under this
section including manufacturer, vendor, and percent recycled content or the approved exemption for
noncompliance.
3. Supporting documentation for approved exemption on products used in the project that do not meet
CPG requirements.
C. The Certification requirement above shall cover at a minimum the following construction materials and
products:
1. Product 1 (To be input during design);
2. Product 2 (To be input during design);
3.8 PESTICIDES
A. Use of pesticides under the scope of this project is authorized, provided the Contractor complies with
requirements outlined within this paragraph and obtains written approval from AFETA Camp Peary’s
Environmental or Safety Officer of all proposed pesticides for the project prior to project start.
B. References
1. AFETA Camp Peary Integrated Pest Management Plan (April 2001 or Current)
C. Approval
1.
All pesticides, herbicides, insecticides , and rodenticides are hazardous materials. Therefore all
requirements concerning Hazardous Material (HAZMAT) review and approval outlined in Paragraph
3.3 of this section apply to pesticides to be used on this project in addition to requirements of
paragraph 3.8. Additionally, a copy of pesticide labels to be used under the scope of this project shall
be included with MSDS information to be maintained on the project site.
D. Applicator Certification
1.
Application of all pesticides shall be accomplished by certified pest control personnel or under the
supervision of a certified pest control operator. The Contractor shall submit personnel certification
with payment request for pesticide application. Certifications shall be from the Commonwealth of
Virginia and shall be valid through duration of work to be accomplished under this contract.
June 23, 2014
01 56 00 9
ENVIRONMENTAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
E. Usage Report
1.
The Contractor shall submit a usage report no later than seven (7) days after pest control applications
are completed for the project. The usage report shall include, as a minimum:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Name, address, and phone number of Contractor;
Name of the applicator;
Building, facility, or area treated;
Target pest(s) to be controlled;
Pesticide Name and EPA Number;
Active Ingredient Applied in pounds;
Date of the application.
F. Disposal
1. The Contractor is prohibited from disposing of excess pesticides on AFETA Camp Peary in
dumpsters or down sanitary, industrial, or storm drains. The Contractor is responsible for disposing
of pesticide waste in accordance with Paragraph 3.3 of this section. Excess pesticides may be
applied on AFETA Camp Peary, if a written request to do so is approved by the COTR.
3.9 FLUORESCENT LIGHT BULBS, HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE BULBS AND BALLASTS
A. The disturbing, removing, replacing, and disposal of fluorescent or High Intensity discharge (HID) lamps
or ballasts is authorized under the scope of this project provided the Contractor complies with
requirements outlined within this paragraph.
B. Fluorescent Light Ballasts
1. Fluorescent light ballasts manufactured after 1979 that do not contain PCBs are marked by the
manufacturer with the words “No PCBs”. If fluorescent light ballast is not marked with the words “No
PCBs” it shall be considered to contain PCBs.
2. Non PCB ballasts shall be recycled by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide containers for the
collection of these ballasts, and the Contractor shall carefully place all ballasts in these containers
and close the lid securely. The labels on the containers shall be left intact, unmarked, uncovered,
and otherwise completely legible. The labels shall state “Universal Waste Ballasts” and managed in
accordance with Chapter 3.2 of this section.
3. PCB containing fluorescent light ballasts that are intact and non leaking shall be recycled by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall provide containers for the collection of these recyclable materials.
The Contractor shall carefully place these ballasts into the containers provided, and shall tightly close
the container when it is full. The labels on the containers shall be left intact, unmarked, uncovered,
and otherwise completely legible. These labels shall state “Universal Waste Ballasts PCBs”. The
Contractor shall manage these materials in accordance with Chapter 3.3 as if these materials were
hazardous waste.
4. PCB containing light ballasts that were not previously identified as leaking but are discovered by the
Contractor to be leaking prior to removal from fixtures shall cause the Contractor to stop work on the
site and immediately notify the COTR.
5. PCB containing fluorescent light ballasts that have been damaged by the Contractor (made to leak)
shall cause the Contractor to stop work on the site immediately and notify the COTR. The Contractor
shall carefully place the damaged ballasts into steel UN stamped drums approved by DOT for
shipping Hazardous Waste and shall securely close the lids. The ballasts shall then be transported to
an approved disposal facility offsite by the Contractor and incinerated at an approved offsite facility by
June 23, 2014
01 56 00 10
ENVIRONMENTAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
the Contractor in accordance with 40CFR 761.75 and in accordance with Chapter 3.3 Hazardous
Materials Management.
C. Fluorescent Light Tubes and High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps
1. All fluorescent light tubes and HID lamps that are removed as part of this work shall be removed
intact and recycled by the Contractor to be handled as “universal waste lamps”. The Contractor shall
provide containers for the collection of these recyclable materials. The Contractor will carefully place
all lights tubes and/or lamps in these containers, keep the lid securely closed at all times, and protect
the containers from precipitation. Containers shall be labeled in accordance with State Universal
Waste requirements for storage and shipping. The labels shall state: “Universal Waste Fluorescent
Lamps” or “Universal Waste HID Lamps”. These two materials must be collected separately and
managed in accordance with Chapter 3.2 of this section.
2. Fluorescent lights tubes and HID lamps that accidentally are broken are solid wastes. The Contractor
shall manage any solid wastes generated by the Contractor in the manner specified in Paragraph 3.2
of this Section.
3. It is imperative that the Contractor does not discard fluorescent lights tubes or HID lamps on base in
dumpsters or other debris collection containers, and shall take appropriate actions to manage them
properly.
END OF SECTION 01 56 00
June 23, 2014
01 56 00 11
ENVIRONMENTAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 01 60 00 # PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 # GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: Selection of products
for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Section 01210 # "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.
Section 01230 # "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.
Section 01420 # "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.
Section 01770 # "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract closeout.
Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from
previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system,"
and terms of similar intent.
1.
2.
3.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model
number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that
is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility,
except that products consisting of recycled#content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated
otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or
where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function,
dimension, in#service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics
that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B.
Substitutions: Contractor#proposed changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of
construction from those required by the Contract Documents.
C.
Basis#of#Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to
establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in#service performance, physical
properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of
other named manufacturers.
June 23, 2014
01 60 00 – 1
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
D.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to the Government.
E.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to
extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for the Government.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product List: Submit a list, in tabular form, showing specified products. Include generic names of
products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product.
1.
Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.
2.
Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
Specification Section number and title.
Generic name used in the Contract Documents.
Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.
Manufacturer's name and address.
Supplier's name and address.
Installer's name and address.
Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period.
Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date.
3.
Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of
completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from
Contract requirements.
4.
COTR's Action: COTR will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed
product list. COTR's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief
explanation of reasons for this action. COTR’s response, or lack of response, does not constitute
a waiver of requirement that products comply with the Contract Documents.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or
fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and
Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
Substitution Request Form: Use form provided at end of this Section. Proposed substitutions
submitted without a fully executed Substitution Request form will not be considered
2.
Documentation:
applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
June 23, 2014
Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as
Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided, or why is would
be in the Government’s best interests to consider the substitution.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts
of the Work and to construction performed by the Government and separate contractors,
that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work
specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
01 60 00 – 2
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
3.
1.5
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance with requirements indicated.
Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,
from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution
with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If
specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time,
include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or
delays in delivery.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the
Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become
necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.
COTR's Action: If necessary, COTR will request additional information or documentation for
evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. COTR will notify Contractor of
acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of
receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. The COTR shall be the sole
judge of the whether a proposed substitution is acceptable.
a.
b.
C.
Bid Documents
Form of Acceptance: A Substitution Request Form noted by the COTR as “Accepted”.
Use product specified if COTR cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution
within time allocated.
Basis#of#Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 01330 #
"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use
on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously
selected products were also options.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration,
and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
June 23, 2014
Schedule delivery to minimize long#term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of
construction spaces.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are
flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed
container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing,
unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure
that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure, elevated above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
01 60 00 – 3
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
8.
9.
10.
1.7
Bid Documents
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and
weather#protection requirements for storage.
Protect stored products from damage.
Product deliveries will not be accepted at Base warehouse. All deliveries must be delivered
directly to the project site.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties
do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification,
ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1.
2.
C.
Unless specifically noted otherwise, warranty periods shall commence upon Substantial
Completion of the Project, or phase of the project in which warranted item is located.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project#specific information and properly
executed.
Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01770 # "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 # PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT OPTIONS
A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are
undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a
complete installation and indicated use and effect.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in
similar situations on other projects.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," COTR will make selection.
Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is COTR's.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish
"salient characteristics" of products.
Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or
approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to
obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. Approval or rejection of proposed equal products
shall be solely by the COTR
Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following:
1.
Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a single
product and manufacturer, provide the product named.
a.
June 23, 2014
Substitutions may be considered only if accompanied by a fully executed “Substitution
Request Form.”
01 60 00 – 4
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
2.
Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturer" or
"Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide only a product by the manufacturer or
from the source named that complies with requirements.
a.
3.
Substitutions may be considered only if accompanied by a fully executed “Substitution
Request Form.”
Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a list of
names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with
requirements.
a.
4.
Bid Documents
Substitutions of other products not listed may be considered only if accompanied by a fully
executed “Substitution Request Form.”
Manufacturers:
Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers"
introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed
that complies with requirements.
a.
Substitutions of other manufacturers may be considered only if accompanied by a fully
executed “Substitution Request Form.”
5.
Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available Products"
introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed
or another product that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in "Comparable
Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
6.
Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available
Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the
manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with
provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
7.
Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled "Product Options" indicate that size,
profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system,
provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable product or system by
another manufacturer. Comply with provisions in "Product Substitutions" Article.
8.
Basis#of#Design Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Basis#of#
Design Product[s]" are included and also introduce or refer to a list of manufacturers' names,
provide either the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named
manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other
characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in "Comparable
Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
a.
9.
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample,
select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches COTR’s
sample. COTR's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.
a.
June 23, 2014
Substitutions may be considered only if accompanied by a fully executed “Substitution
Request Form.”
If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with
other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents on
"substitutions" for selection of a matching product.
01 60 00 – 5
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
10.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from
manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and manufacturer)
that complies with other specified requirements.
a.
b.
11.
2.2
Bid Documents
Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, COTR will select color, pattern, or texture from
manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.
Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns,
textures" or similar phrase, COTR will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.
Allowances: Refer to Section 01210 # “Allowances” and individual Specification Sections for
provisions for allowances that control product selection and for procedures required for
processing such selections.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Timing: COTR will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to
Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered solely at the discretion of COTR.
B.
Conditions: COTR will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are
satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, COTR will return requests without action, except to
record noncompliance with these requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.3
Requested substitution offers the Government a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities the Government
must assume. The Government's additional responsibilities may include compensation to its
consultants for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the
Government, and similar considerations.
Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated
results.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty or superior warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been
coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other
products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other
required submittals, for the COTR’s consideration of an unnamed product:
1.
2.
3.
June 23, 2014
Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated
results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
01 60 00 – 6
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
4.
5.
Bid Documents
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names
and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
Samples, if requested.
PART 3 # EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 60 00
June 23, 2014
01 60 00 – 7
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
MAY 31 2001
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
TO: ________________________________________________________________________________________
PROJECT: ________________________________________________________ NO. _____________________
We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above project:
Section: ____________ , Paragraph: ________ , Specified item: _______________________________________
Proposed Substitution: ________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
(Attach complete technical, descriptive and performance data for the proposed substitution, including
manufacturer’s name and contact information, product trade name, installer’s name and contact information, and
laboratory test reports, if applicable.)
(Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will
require for proper installation; and fill in the blanks below:)
A.
Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on the Drawings? _____How? _____________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
B.
Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs
caused by requested substitution? _______________________________________________________
C.
What effect does substitution have on other trades?__________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
D.
Differences between proposed substitution and specified item? (Attach an itemized comparative
analysis.) ___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
E.
Product History:
F.
Manufacturer’s warranties of the proposed and specified items are:
[
G.
[ ] New product
] Same
[
[ ] 2#5 yrs old
[ ] 5#10 yrs old
[ ] More than 10 yrs old
] Different _____________________________ (Explain on attachment)
Manufacturer’s maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, are:
[
] Similarly available
[
] Different _____________________________ (Explain on attachment)
H.
Credit to Owner, if accepted: ....................................................................................... $ ______________
I.
Similar Local Installations:
Project: ____________________________
Architect: __________________________________
Address: ___________________________
Owner: ____________________________________
__________________________________
Date Installed: ______________________________
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS – “SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM”
01600 Attachment – page A1
The Contractor states that the function, appearance, quality and performance standards are equivalent or
superior to the specified item, and that no increase in Contract Time is involved. Claims for additional costs
related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived.
Contractor:
Date: ___________
COTR Response:
Date: ___________
__________________________________________
[
] Accepted
[
] Accepted as Noted
__________________________________________
[
] Not Accepted
[
] Received Too Late
Subcontractor
Date: ___________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
By _______________________________________
__________________________________________
Remarks: __________________________________
__________________________________________
* * * * *
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS – “SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM”
01600 Attachment – page A2
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but
not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Construction layout.
Field engineering and surveying.
General installation of products.
Coordination of Government installed products.
Progress cleaning.
Starting and adjusting.
Protection of installed construction.
Correction of the Work.
Section 01310 "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field
engineering with other construction activities.
Section 01330 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
Section 01731 "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching
necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work.
Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record
Documents, recording of Government accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and
final cleaning.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include
lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and
owners, and other information specified.
B.
Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of
improvements comply with requirements.
C.
Landfill Receipts: Submit two (2) copies of receipts issued by a landfill facility, for all construction waste
and debris. Provide receipts from a facility licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste
disposal.
June 23, 2014
01 70 00 1
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
1.4
Bid Documents
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land surveying services of the
kind indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction
indicated as existing is not guaranteed. Before start of work, investigate and verify the existence and
location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.
1.
B.
Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the
existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
Utilities which are not found but which are damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired or
replaced at the COTR’s sole option and at the Contractor’s cost.
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary
sewer, storm sewer, and water service piping; and underground electrical services.
Furnish location data to the Government.
Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator
present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1.
Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work
is required by other Sections, include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
June 23, 2014
Description of the Work.
List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
Recommended corrections.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes
or primers.
Examine roughing in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be
installed.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
01 70 00 2
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
3.2
Bid Documents
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to the Government that is necessary to adjust, move, or
relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or
affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by the Government or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
3.
Notify the Government not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without the Government’s written permission.
Take all reasonable measures to ensure that interruptions are minimized in duration and scope.
C.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other
construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
D.
Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on
Drawings.
E.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed
description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract
Documents.
3.3
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in
relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify the
COTR promptly.
B.
General: Engage a professional engineer or licensed surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted
surveying practices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and
elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required
dimensions.
Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
Notify the COTR when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.
Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by
authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil
placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work.
Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and
piers from two or more locations.
June 23, 2014
01 70 00 3
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
E.
3.4
Bid Documents
Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels.
Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each
survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by
COTR and Government’s consultants.
FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points
before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during
construction operations.
1.
2.
B.
Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two benchmarks on Project site for the duration of
the construction period, referenced to data established by survey control points.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of
the COTR. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report
the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to COTR before proceeding.
Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly.
Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.
Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary
reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its
original condition.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation,
as indicated in Construction Documents. Promptly notify COTR of any discrepancies arising.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and
ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 10 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain
conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading
in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F.
Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights
directed by COTR.
2.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
June 23, 2014
01 70 00 4
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
G.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange
joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
1.
2.
H.
3.6
Bid Documents
The location of joints and splices in underground utilities shall be clearly marked and dimensioned
on Record Drawings.
Joints and splices in underground utilities shall be made with the COTR present.
Hazardous Materials:
hazardous.
Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
GOVERNMENT INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A.
Site Access: Provide access to Project site for the Government's construction forces and for separate
contractors employed by the Government.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by the
Government's construction forces.
3.7
1.
Construction Schedule: Inform the Government of the Contractor's preferred construction
schedule for the Government's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a
mutually agreeable timetable. Notify the Government if changes to schedule are required due to
differences in actual construction progress.
2.
The Government will provide Contractor with a list of activities to be performed by its own forces
and by other contractors employed directly by the Government. The Contractor shall include
these activities in his Schedule of Construction, and shall coordinate activities to minimize
disruption to the project schedule and flow of work.
3.
Preinstallation Conferences: Include the Government's construction forces at preinstallation
conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive the Government's work. Attend
preinstallation conferences conducted by the Government's construction forces if portions of the
Work depend on the Government's construction.
4.
Coordination meetings may be requested by the COTR to schedule work by the Government with
work of the Contractor.
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress
cleaning for joint use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly.
Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.
Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is
expected to rise above 80 deg F.
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper
execution of the Work.
1.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
June 23, 2014
01 70 00 5
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
2.
Bid Documents
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom clean or vacuum the entire work
area, as appropriate.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of
manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended.
If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to
health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage
and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely
remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
1.
Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
H.
Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on site will not be permitted. Washing waste
materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
I.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials
already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or
deterioration at Substantial Completion.
J.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the
remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability
without damaging effects.
K.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious
exposure during the construction period.
3.8
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units,
replace with new units, and retest.
B.
Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.
operation.
C.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory authorized service representative is required to inspect field
assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1
Section "Quality Requirements."
3.9
Adjust equipment for proper
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
June 23, 2014
01 70 00 6
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
B.
3.10
A.
Bid Documents
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
CORRECTION OF THE WORK
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
1.
Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with
matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B.
Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C.
Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without
visible evidence of repair.
D.
Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that
cannot be repaired.
E.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 01 70 00
June 23, 2014
01 70 00 7
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but
not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Inspection procedures.
Project Record Documents.
Operation and maintenance manuals.
Warranties.
Instruction of Government's personnel.
Final cleaning.
Section 01290
"Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for
Substantial and Final Completion.
Section 01320
"Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting Final Completion
construction photographs and negatives.
Section 01770 "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site.
Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for
products of those Sections.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion,
complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
June 23, 2014
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list,
and reasons why the Work is not complete. Punch list shall be completed in format described in
this Section.
Advise COTR of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents. Unless specifically noted otherwise in Specifications,
warrantee periods, maintenance agreements and similar obligations shall commence on the date
of Substantial Completion. With the exception of building or project wide installations such as air
handlers, chillers and the like, where construction is phased and there is more than one
Substantial Completion, commencement of warrantee periods, maintenance agreements and
similar obligations for Work in a given phase shall commence on the day of Substantial
Completion for that phase of the Work.
Obtain and submit releases permitting the Government unrestricted use of the Work and access
to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
01 77 00 1
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.
Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or
settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by the COTR.
Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and security system in coordination with the
Government. Advise the Government's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete startup and testing of systems.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction
tools, and similar elements.
Advise the COTR of changeover in heat and other utilities.
Submit changeover information related to the Government's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request,
COTR will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. COTR will
prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either
on Contractor's list or additional items identified by COTR, that must be completed or corrected before
certificate will be issued.
1.
2.
1.4
Bid Documents
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
FINAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion,
complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, COTR
will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. COTR will prepare a
final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be
completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
1.5
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
Submit certified copy of COTR's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed
or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by COTR. The certified copy of the list shall state
that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
Submit pest control final inspection report and warranty.
Instruct Government’s personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A.
Preparation: Submit one hard copy and one copy in electronic format. Include name and identification
of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing
correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of
construction.
June 23, 2014
01 77 00 2
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
1.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from
lowest floor to highest floor.
2.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
1.6
Bid Documents
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
Page number.
Prepare list in electronic format, using a word processing or spreadsheet program which is
compatible with the COTR’s project management system, such that the COTR and/or his
consultants can add items which require correction.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
1.7
General: Refer to Section 01781 – “Project Record Documents.”
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance
of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and
maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows:
1.
Operation Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Maintenance Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
Emergency instructions and procedures.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards.
Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations.
Description of controls and sequence of operations.
Piping diagrams.
Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts.
Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier.
Maintenance procedures.
Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance.
Maintenance record forms.
Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.
Copies of maintenance service agreements.
Copies of warranties and bonds.
Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Group contents by
trade or by Specification Division and Section wherever possible. Bind and index data in heavy duty, 3
ring, vinyl covered, loose leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket
inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Clearly and neatly identify each binder on front
and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and
subject matter of contents.
June 23, 2014
01 77 00 3
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
1.8
Bid Documents
PRODUCT AND MATERIAL LISTS
A.
1.9
General: Refer to Section 01781 – “Project Record Documents.”
WARRANTIES
A.
Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of COTR for designated portions of the Work
where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.
B.
Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated
portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by the Government during construction
period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project
Manual.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy duty, 3 ring, vinyl covered, loose leaf binders, thickness as
necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8 1/2 by 11 inch paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to
identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation,
including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project
name, and name of Contractor.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of
the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or
property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A.
Instruction: Instruct Government's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems,
and equipment not part of a system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
June 23, 2014
Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures.
Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation,
provide similar instruction at the start of each season until all operational scenarios have been
demonstrated.
Schedule training with Government with at least seven days' advance notice.
Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and
course content.
The Government may elect to videotape each demonstration and training session for future use.
Cooperate with Government’s efforts in this regard.
01 77 00 4
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
B.
Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each
system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each
training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.2
Bid Documents
System design and operational philosophy.
Review of documentation.
Operations.
Adjustments.
Troubleshooting.
Maintenance.
Repair.
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste removal operations to comply with local
laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface
or unit to condition expected in a new commercial building. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of
Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
June 23, 2014
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign
substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign
deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even textured surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard surfaced finishes to a dirt free condition, free of
stains, films, efflorescence and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums,
shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if
visible soil or stains remain.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove
glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision obscuring materials. Replace chipped or
broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking
care not to scratch surfaces or coatings.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that
already show evidence of repair or restoration. Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels,
including mechanical and electrical nameplates.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar
equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting
from water exposure.
01 77 00 5
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
p.
q.
r.
s.
Bid Documents
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of
diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.
Remove plastic protection and clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function
with full efficiency. Replace dented or damaged reflectors; replace burned out bulbs, and
those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent
and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C.
Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project
of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
D.
Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess
materials on Government property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into
drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.
END OF SECTION 01 77 00
June 23, 2014
01 77 00 6
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 01 78 01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents,
including the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Record Drawings.
Record Specifications.
Record Product Data.
Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures and maintenance manual
requirements.
Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of
products in those Sections.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1.
Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:
a.
Final Submittal: Submit one set of marked up Record Prints, one set of record
transparencies, and three copies printed from Record Transparencies. Print each
Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. Provide
additional drawings where original documents are not in sufficient detail or large enough
scale to permit accurate recording of built
B.
Record Specifications:
modifications.
C.
Record Product and Material Data: Assemble a complete Product and Material List, organized
according to the Specification Divisions and Sections. List all products and materials actually used in
the project. Do not include products and materials which were included in the specifications, but which
were ultimately replaced by other products or materials. For each item, include the following, where
applicable:
1.
2.
3.
June 23, 2014
Submit one copy of Project Specifications, including addenda and contract
Specification Section and paragraph where product or material was named.
Generic name & type of product or material
Location where product or material was used in the project.
01 78 01 1
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Building 1100 Café
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Bid Documents
Proprietary product or material name, model number, color, sheen, finish, size, thickness,
accessories, and other information to firmly and accurately describe the item, such that additional,
matching products or materials can be easily obtained by the Owner.
Manufacturer’s name and contact information.
Distributor’s name and contact information.
Installer’s name and contact information.
Warrantee period and actual warrantee expiration date.
Organize in table or spreadsheet format, and provide one hard copy and one electronic copy to
the COTR. For hard copy, bind and index data in heavy duty, 3 ring, vinyl covered, loose leaf
binder(s), in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to
receive folded oversized sheets. Clearly and neatly identify binder(s) on front and spine with the
printed title "PRODUCT AND MATERIAL LIST”, Project name, and subject matter of contents.
Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit
marked up Product Data as an insert in the manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue or black line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings.
1.
Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that
shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or
entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked up Record Prints.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
June 23, 2014
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to
identify or measure and record later.
Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before
enclosing concealed installations.
Recordation of data in a timely manner shall be a pre condition of Payment Request
authorization. The COTR shall review Record Prints on a monthly basis and to coincide
with submission of Contractor’s Requests for Payment. Payment shall not be authorized if
record data is not up to date.
Dimensional changes to Drawings.
Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
Depths of foundations below first floor.
Locations and depths of underground utilities, including locations of splices.
Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
Revisions to electrical circuitry.
Actual equipment locations.
Duct size and routing.
Locations of concealed internal utilities.
Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
Changes made following COTR's written orders.
Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
01 78 01 2
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Building 1100 Café
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual
physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross
reference on the Contract Drawings.
Mark record sets with erasable, red colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original
Drawings.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and
similar identification, where applicable.
Handover of Record Documents: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial
Completion, review marked up Record Prints with COTR and Government’s consultants. Add additional
information as directed, and hand over documents to COTR for use by the Government’s consultants.
1.
2.
2.2
Bid Documents
Cooperate with COTR and Government’s consultants in providing additional information
regarding record data.
Make field measurements, produce drawings and sketches, meet with the COTR and
Government’s consultants when requested, and perform other tasks as requested by the COTR
to assist in the accurate and complete preparation of Project Record Drawings.
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from
that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.3
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment
furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
Record the name of the manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.
Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable.
Change Order proposals shall include resubmitting updated Product Data.
MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A.
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record
keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous
records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A.
B.
Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record
Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do
not wait until the end of Project.
Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field
office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents
June 23, 2014
01 78 01 3
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible
condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for
COTR’s reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 01 78 01
June 23, 2014
01 78 01 4
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 02 41 00
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 10 00 Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises.
B.
Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers,
and waste removal.
C.
Section 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of
bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of
removed products; temporary bracing and shoring.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
29 CFR 1926 U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.
PART 3 EXECUTION
2.01 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent
structures and the public.
1. Obtain required permits.
2. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be
removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of
unstable structures.
3. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.
4. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and
occupants.
5. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit.
6. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do
not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from
removal operations.
7. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment
will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property.
B.
Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner.
C.
Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.
1. Provide bracing and shoring.
2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures.
3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.
D.
If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Architect
and Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's,
and mercury.
2.02 EXISTING UTILITIES
A.
Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their
requirements; obtain required permits.
B.
Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.
C.
Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction.
D.
Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7
days prior written notification to Owner.
E.
Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take offs that are in use without at
least 3 days prior written notification to Owner.
June 23, 2014
02 41 00 1
DEMOLITION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
F.
Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of
utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if
necessary.
G.
Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected
and abandoned utilities.
H.
Prepare building demolition areas by disconnecting and capping utilities outside the demolition
zone; identify and mark utilities to be subsequently reconnected, in same manner as other
utilities to remain.
2.03 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS
A.
Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and
existing record documents only.
1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.
2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.
3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be
apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition.
B.
Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.
1. Remove items indicated on drawings.
C.
Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and
Telecommunications): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated.
1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to
equipment and operational components.
2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new
services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready
for service.
3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal.
4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above
accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub
and tag with identification.
D.
Protect existing work to remain.
1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.
2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.
3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
4. Patch as specified for patching new work.
2.04 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL
A.
Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.
B.
Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.
C.
Clean up spillage and wind blown debris from public and private lands.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
02 41 00 2
DEMOLITION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 03 10 00
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Formwork for cast in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.
B.
Openings for other work.
C.
Form accessories.
D.
Form stripping.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing.
B.
Section 03 30 00 Cast in Place Concrete.
C.
Section 03 39 00 Concrete Curing.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 1999.
B.
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International; 2005.
C.
ACI 347R Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2003.
D.
ASME A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2004.
E.
PS 1 Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology
(Department of Commerce); 1995.
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code
requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Requirements; for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on void form materials and installation requirements.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints and
ties.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301.
1. Maintain one copy of standards on project site.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable code for design, fabrication, erection and removal of formwork.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD FORM MATERIALS
A.
Form Materials: At the discretion of the Contractor.
B.
Softwood Plywood: PS 1, C Grade, Group 2.
June 23, 2014
03 10 00 1
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
C.
Softwood Plywood: PS 1, B B High Density Concrete Form Overlay, Class I.
D.
Plywood: Douglas Fir Spruce species; solid one side grade; sound undamaged sheets with clean,
true edges.
2.02 PREFABRICATED FORMS
A.
Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum 16 gage matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of
concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces.
B.
Preformed Plastic Forms: Thermoplastic polystyrene form liner, tight fitting, stiffened to support
weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces.
C.
Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of
concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished concrete surfaces.
2.03 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A.
Form Ties: Snap off type, galvanized metal or plastic, fixed length, cone type, with
waterproofing washer, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch in concrete
surface.
B.
Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil that will not stain concrete, absorb moisture, impair
natural bonding of concrete finish coatings, or affect color characteristics of concrete finish
coatings.
C.
Corners: Filleted or chamfered, rigid plastic or wood strip; maximum possible lengths.
D.
Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel, 22 gage thick, longest possible lengths, with alignment
splines for joints, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete
formwork.
E.
Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength
and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree
with drawings.
3.02 EARTH FORMS
A.
Earth forms are permitted for footings only.
B.
Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete.
3.03 ERECTION – FORMWORK
A.
Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with
requirements of ACI 301.
B.
Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to
overstressing by construction loads.
C.
Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete
during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
D.
Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.
E.
Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on
drawings.
F.
Provide fillet and chamfer strips on external corners of beams, and columns.
G. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to
formwork.
June 23, 2014
03 10 00 2
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
Building 1100 Cafe
H.
Bid Documents
If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over
reinforcement, request instructions from Architect before proceeding.
3.04 APPLICATION , FORM RELEASE AGENT
A.
Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
C.
Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied
coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water.
Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.
3.05 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A.
Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete
work.
B.
Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.
C.
Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses,
sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.
D.
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level,
and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
E.
Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are continuous
without displacing reinforcement and form a watertight barrier.
F.
Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and
.
inspection Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain.
G. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly
fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.
3.06 FORM CLEANING
A.
Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.
B.
Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
1. Flush with water or use compressed ac to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water
and debris drain to exterior through clean out ports.
2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de icing salts. Do not
use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated
enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.
3.07 FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01
4000.
B.
Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with
formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.
3.09 FORM REMOVAL
A.
Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own
weight and imposed loads.
B.
Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete
surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
June 23, 2014
03 10 00 3
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
Building 1100 Cafe
C.
Bid Documents
Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard
damaged forms.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
03 10 00 4
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 03 20 00
CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Reinforcing steel for cast in place concrete.
B.
Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories.
B.
Section 03 30 00 Cast in Place Concrete.
C.
Section 04 20 00 Unit Masonry: Reinforcement for masonry.
D.
Electrical Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Grounding connection to concrete
reinforcement.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 1999.
B.
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements For Reinforced Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International; 2005.
C.
ACI SP 66 ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute International; 2004.
D.
ASTM A 82 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2002.
E.
ASTM A 185 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete;
2002.
F.
ASTM A 8151A 615M Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2004.
G. ASTM A 775/A 775M Standard Specification for Epoxy Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2001.
H.
ASTM A 884/A 884M Standard Specification for Epoxy Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Fabric for Reinforcement; 2002.
I.
ASTM D 39631D 3963M Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy
Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars; 2001.
J.
AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society; 1998.
K.
CRSI (DA4) Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 2001.
L.
CRSI (P1) Placing Reinforcing Bars; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 1997.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Requirements, for submittal procedures
B.
Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP 66. Include bar schedules, shapes of bent
bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices.
C.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that reinforcing steel, accessories, and products supplied for this
project meet or exceed specified requirements.
D.
Reports: Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
June 23, 2014
03 20 00 1
CONCRETE REINFORCING
Building 1100 Cafe
A.
Bid Documents
Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301.
1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site.
B.
Welders' Certificates: Submit certifications for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS
qualification within the previous 12 months.
PART.2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 6151A 615M Grade 60 (420).
1.
Plain billet steel bars.
2.
Unfinished.
B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain type.
1.
Mesh Size and Wire Gage: As indicated on drawings.
C. Reinforcement Accessories:
1.
Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage.
2.
Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of
reinforcement during concrete placement.
3.
Provide plastic components for placement within 1 1/2 inches of weathering surfaces.
2.02 FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) Manual of Standard Practice.
B.
Welding of reinforcement is permitted only with the specific approval of Architect. Perform
welding in accordance with AWS D1.4.
C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress.
1. Review locations of splices with Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PLACEMENT
A.
Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required
position.
B.
Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.
C.
Accommodate placement of formed openings.
D.
Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement
E.
Bond and ground all reinforcement to requirements of Section 26 0526.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01 40 00, will inspect installed
reinforcement for conformance to contract documents before concrete placement.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A.
Reinforcement for Foundation Wall Framing Members and Slab on Grade: Deformed bars and
welded wire reinforcement, galvanized finish.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
03 20 00 2
CONCRETE REINFORCING
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Elevated concrete slabs.
B. Floors and slabs on grade.
C. Concrete foundation walls, columns, beams and piers.
D. Joint devices associated with concrete work.
E. Skim coat finish for all marred surfaces exposed to view.
F.
Miscellaneous concrete elements.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Exterior Improvements Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Sidewalks, curbs and gutters.
B. Section 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork.
C.
Section 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing.
D.
Section 03 39 00 Concrete Curing.
E.
Section 07 90 05 Joint Sealers.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ACI 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002).
B.
ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 2005.
C.
ACI 302.1R Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute
International; 2004.
D.
ACI 304R Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete
Institute International; 2000.
E.
ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete institute International; 1999.
F.
ACI 306R Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute international; 1988.
G. ACI 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001.
H.
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International; 2005.
I.
ASTM C 33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2003.
J.
ASTM C 391C 39M Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 2003.
K.
ASTM C 941C 94M Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete; 2003a.
L.
ASTM C 1431C 143M Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 2003.
M. ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2002a.
N.
ASTM C 171 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2003.
O. ASTM C 173/C 173M Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; 2001.
June 23, 2014
03 30 00 1
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
Building 1100 Cafe
P.
Bid Documents
ASTM C 260 Standard Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2001.
Q. ASTM C 309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete; 2003.
R.
ASTM C 330 Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete; 2004.
S.
ASTM C 4941C 494M Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2004.
T.
ASTM C 618 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for
Use in Concrete; 2003.
U.
ASTM C 6851C 685M Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and
Continuous Mixing; 2001.
V.
ASTM C 881/C 881M Standard Specification for Epoxy Resin Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete; 2002.
W. ASTM C 1059 Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete;
1999.
X.
ASTM C 1107 Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic Cement Grout (Nonshrink);
2002.
Y.
ASTM D 994 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete
(Bituminous Type); 1998 (Reapproved 2003).
Z.
ASTM D 1751 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 1999.
AA. ASTM E 1745 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil
or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 1997.
BB. COE CRD C 513 COE Specifications for Rubber Waterstops; Corps of Engineers; 1974.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit for approval, design mixes for each type of concrete.
B.
Submit Compression Strength Test Reports.
C.
Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer’s product data for all admixtures.
2. Submit manufacturer’s product data for waterstops including complete general information and
specific installation instructions, recommendations and limitations.
D.
Samples: Submit two, 6 inch long samples of waterstops and construction joint devices.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required with
adjacent construction for concrete accessories.
F.
Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and
components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B.
Acquire cement from same source and aggregate from same source for entire project.
C.
Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
D.
Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK
June 23, 2014
03 30 00 2
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
Building 1100 Cafe
A.
Bid Documents
Comply with requirements of Section 03 10 00.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT
A.
Comply with requirements of Section 03 20 00.
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I II Normal Portland type.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33.
C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330.
D. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
E. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C 618, Class N.
F.
Silica Fume: ACI 211.1
G. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.04 ADMIXTURES
A.
Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B.
Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A Water Reducing, Type C Accelerating, and
Type G Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding.
1. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight
of cement.
2.05 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
A.
Reglets: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, with temporary filler to prevent concrete intrusion during
placement.
B.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II acrylic non redispersable type.
C.
Epoxy Bonding System: ASTM C 881, type as required by project conditions.
D.
Underslab Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, minimum 6 mils thick.
E.
Non Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107; premixed compound consisting of non metallic aggregate,
cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.
1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,400 psi.
2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7,000 psi.
F.
Curing Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 03 39 00.
G. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or translucent.
2.06 JOINT DEVICES AND MATERIALS
A.
Waterstops: Provide Waterstop RX bentonite waterstops and Cetseal adhesive as manufactured
by Collod Environmental Technologies Company (CETCO), 2870 Forbs Ave, Hoffman Estates, IL
60192, USA or approved equal system.
B.
Joint Filler: Non extruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM D
1751, 1/4 inch thick and 4 inches deep; tongue and groove profile.
C.
Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07 9005.
2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A.
All structural concrete, footings, foundation walls, beams and columns, and elevated slabs: 4,000
PSI 28 day concrete.
B.
Slab on Grade Floors: 4000 PSI 28 day concrete.
June 23, 2014
03 30 00 3
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
C.
Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
D.
Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of
field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.
1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
E.
Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates
recommended by manufacturer.
F.
Normal Weight Concrete:
1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39IC 39M at 28 days: As
scheduled or As indicated on drawings.
2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 20 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
3. Calcined Pozzolan Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
4. Silica Fume Content: Maximum 5 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
5. Water Cement Ratio: Maximum 55 percent by weight.
6. Water Cement Ratio: Foundation Walls, Piers and Columns maximum 48 percent by weight.
7. Water Cement Ratio: Slab On Grade and Toppings maximum 45 percent by weight.
8. Total Air Content: 4 6 % percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173 1.5% at
concrete exposed to freeze / thaw cycles.
9. Maximum Slump: 3 inches.
10. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1.5 inch for footings and 1 inch for all others.
2.08 MIXING
A.
On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C 685. Mix each batch not
less than 1 1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes.
B.
Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify fines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all
applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete.
B.
Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.
C.
Coordinate placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form
accessories.
D.
Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E.
In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete,
insert steel dowels and pack solid with non shrink grout.
F.
Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal
watertight by taping edges and ends. Cover with sand to depth shown on drawings; repair
damaged vapor retarder before covering.
3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT
June 23, 2014
03 30 00 4
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
A.
Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and
accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete
coverage required for protection.
B.
Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both
directions. Splice laps with tie wire.
C.
Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are
accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement.
3.04 WATERSTOP INSTALLATION
A. Procedures shall include but not be limited to the following. All waterstops shall be installed per the
manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
1. Substrate inspection and conditions:
a. The installer shall examine conditions of substrates and other conditions and notify the
contractor in writing of circumstances detrimental to the proper completion of the work.
b. Installation shall not proceed when work areas are flooded or wet to the extent that would
cause waterstops to hydrate prior to concrete encapsulation.
2. Surface preparation:
a. Remove dirt, debris, oil, grease, cement laitance, or other foreign matter that will impair or
negatively affect the installation of the waterstop. Protect adjacent material surfaces from
damage or contamination from during installation operations.
3. General installation guidelines:
a. Install waterstop in all applicable vertical and horizontal cast in place concrete construction
joints and around applicable penetrations and structural members. Maintain minimum
concrete coverage as required by the manufacturer.
b. Adhere the waterstop to the concrete per the manufacturers recommendations, placing the
maximum practical lengths to minimize end joints. End joints shall be made per the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
c. Protect waterstop form pre hydration prior to concrete placement and product
encapsulation. Replace any waterstop material that exhibits significant expansion prior to
concrete encapsulation.
3.05 PLACING CONCRETE
A.
Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B.
Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1 R.
C.
Notify Engineer not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations.
D.
Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices
will not be disturbed during concrete placement.
E.
Repair undersiab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with
vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.
F.
Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler.
G. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to
resist movement by wet concrete.
H.
Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface. Conform to Section
07 9005 for finish joint sealer requirements.
I.
Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
June 23, 2014
03 30 00 5
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
J.
Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top
to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
K.
Install joint device anchors for expansion joint assemblies specified. Maintain correct position to
allow joint cover to be flush with floor and wall finish.
L.
Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07 9005.
M. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints.
N.
Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur.
O. Place floor slabs in checkerboard or sawcut pattern indicated.
P.
Sawn joints shall be cut as soon as the concrete has sufficient set to prevent raveling. Joints shall
be cut using a “soff cut” saw.
Q. Floor slabs shall be finished to a minimum flatness F number, FF=25 and a minimum levelness F
number, FL=20 in any direction.
3.06 SEPARATE FLOOR TOPPINGS
A.
Prior to placing floor topping, roughen substrate concrete surface and remove deleterious
material. Broom and vacuum clean.
B.
Place required dividers, edge strips, reinforcing, and other items to be cast in.
C.
Place concrete floor toppings to required lines and levels.
3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING
A.
Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.
B.
Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas ¼ inch or more in
height.
C.
Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas ¼ inch or
more in height. Provide finish as follows:
1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not
more than 24 hours after form removal.
D.
Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:
1. Steel trowel surfaces that will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set
quarry tile, and thin set ceramic tile.
2. Steel trowel surfaces that will be left exposed with light broom finish at all walkways.
a.
E.
Chemical Hardener: After slab has cured, apply water diluted hardener in three coats per
manufacturer's instructions, allowing 24 hours between coats.
In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains as
indicated on drawings.
3.08 CURING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with requirements of Section 03 3900.
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Provide services of an independent testing agency to perform field quality control tests, as
specified in Section 01 4000.
B.
Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
C.
Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review
prior to commencement of concrete operations.
June 23, 2014
03 30 00 6
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
D.
Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance
with specification requirements.
E.
Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 391C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete
test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 50 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed.
Contractor shall provide a curing box or a minimum 100 quart cooler for storage of test cylinders
prior to pick up.
F.
Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same
conditions as concrete it represents.
3.10 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A.
Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Engineer and Contractor
within 24 hours of test.
B.
Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or
specified requirements.
C.
Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Engineer. The cost of
additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.
D.
Do not patch, fill, touch up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of
Engineer for each individual area.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
03 30 00 7
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 03 39 00
CONCRETE CURING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Initial and final curing of horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 30 00 Cast in Place Concrete.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 2005.
B. ACI 302.1R Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute
International; 2004.
C. ACI 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International;
2001.
D. ASTM C 171 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2003.
E. ASTM C 309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete; 2003.
F. ASTM D 2103 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting; 2003.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Requirements, for submittal procedures.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1 R.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver curing materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309 Type 1 Clear or translucent, Class A.
B. Moisture Retaining Sheet; ASTM C 171.
1. Curing paper, regular.
2. Polyethylene film, clear, minimum nominal thickness of 0.0040 in.
3. White burlap polyethylene sheet, weighing not less than 10 oz/per linear yd, 40 inches wide.
C. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 2103, 6 mil thick, clear.
D. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to be cured,
3.02 EXECUTION + HORIZONTAL SURFACES
A. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308.
June 23, 2014
03 39 00 1
CONCRETE CURING
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
B. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet for 7 days.
C. Moisture Retaining Sheet: Lap strips not less than 3 inches and seal with waterproof tape or
adhesive; secure at edges; maintain in place for not less than 4 days.
D. Absorptive Moisture Retaining Sheet: Saturate burlap polyethylene and place burlap side down
over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place for 7 days.
E. Membrane Curing Compound: Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions in one coat.
3.03 EXECUTION + VERTICAL SURFACES
A. Cure surfaces in accordance with ACI 308.
B. Spraying: Spray water over surfaces and maintain wet for 7 days.
C. Membrane Curing Compound: Apply compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in
one coat.
3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface.
3.05 SCHEDULES
A. All Other Floor Areas: Membrane curing compound, acrylic type, translucent color.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
03 39 00 2
CONCRETE CURING
Range 37 Latrine
Bid Documents
SECTION 04 20 01
MASONRY VENEER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Concrete Block.
B.
Clay Facing Brick.
C.
Mortar and Grout.
D.
Reinforcement and Anchorage.
E.
Flashings.
F.
Accessories.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ACI 530/530.1/ERTA Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures
and Related Commentaries; American Concrete Institute International; 2011.
B.
ASTM A153/A153M Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
C.
ASTM A615/A615M Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2013.
D.
ASTM A1064/A1064M Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2013.
E.
ASTM C90 Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2013.
F.
ASTM C91/C91M Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.
G.
ASTM C216 Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or
Shale); 2013.
H.
ASTM C270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2012.
I.
ASTM C476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, and mortar.
C.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the
contract documents.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or
applicable building code, whichever is more stringent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.
Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:
1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as
indicated on the drawings for specific locations.
2. Load Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight.
a. Hollow block.
2.02 BRICK UNITS
A.
Facing Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW.
1. Color and texture: Match existing building.
June 23, 2014
04 20 01 1
MASONRY VENEER
Range 37 Latrine
2.
Bid Documents
Nominal size: Match existing building.
2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M Type S.
1. Colored mortar: Premixed cement as required to match existing building.
B.
Water: Clean and potable.
2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, grade 40 (280) yield grade, deformed billet bars;
galvanized.
B.
Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type; ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after
fabrication to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods;
width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage
on each exposure.
C.
Metal to Metal Fasteners: Self drilling, self tapping screws; corrosion resistant finish or hot dip
galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M.
2.05 FLASHINGS
A.
Rubberized Asphalt Flashing: Self adhering polymer modified asphalt sheet; 0.025 inch total
thickness; with cross linked polyethylene top and bottom surfaces.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A.
Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding;
____ inch wide x by maximum lengths available.
B.
Weeps: Molded PVC grilles, insect resistant.
C.
Cleaning Solution: Non acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
2.07 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Proportion Specification.
1. Exterior, non loadbearing masonry: Type S.
B.
Grout: ASTM C476. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine
grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaces
with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.
B.
Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.
3.02 COURSING
A.
Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B.
Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform
thickness.
C.
Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Bond: Running.
2. Mortar Joints: Concave.
D.
Brick Units:
1. Bond: Running.
2. Mortar Joints: Match existing building.
3.03 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS
A.
Install weeps in veneer walls at 32 inches on center horizontally above through wall flashing,
above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls.
June 23, 2014
04 20 01 2
MASONRY VENEER
Range 37 Latrine
Bid Documents
3.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE + MASONRY VENEER
A.
Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.
B.
Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
3.05 MASONRY FLASHINGS
A.
Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all
locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.
B.
Extend laminated and ______ flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry.
C.
Lap end joints of flashings at least 4 inches and seal watertight with mastic or elastic sealant.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
B.
Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
04 20 01 3
MASONRY VENEER
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 07 21 00
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall, ceiling, and roof construction.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing: Board insulation as wall sheathing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C665 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.
B.
ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
C.
ASTM E136 Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750
Degrees C; 2012.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product
limitations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665;
friction fit.
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Combustibility: Non combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for
facing, if any.
4. Facing: Unfaced.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 BATT INSTALLATION
A.
Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install in exterior wall spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
C.
Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.
D.
Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services
within the plane of the insulation.
E.
At metal framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation; lap and seal sheet retarder
joints over member face.
F.
Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder.
G.
Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other
items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place.
H.
PROTECTION
1. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
07 21 00 1
THERMAL INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 07 90 05
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Sealants and joint backing.
B.
Precompressed foam sealers.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C834 Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010.
B.
ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.
C.
ASTM C1193 Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
D.
SCAQMD 1168 South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition;
www.aqmd.gov.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples, 3/8 x 2 inch in size illustrating sealant colors for selection.
1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SEALANTS
A.
Sealants and Primers General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound
(VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.
B.
General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M,
G, and A; single component.
1. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.
b. Joints between concrete and other materials.
c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.
d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.
C.
General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF
single component, paintable.
1. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.
b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.
c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.
D.
Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C920, Uses I, M and A; single component, mildew
resistant.
1. Applications: Use for:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A.
Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC;
oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
B.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
June 23, 2014
07 90 05 1
JOINT SEALERS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of
surfaces and material installation instructions.
B.
Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C.
Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
D.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
E.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer
when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
F.
Tool joints concave.
G.
Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and
intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.
3.02 CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
3.03 PROTECTION
A.
Protect sealants until cured.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
07 90 05 2
JOINT SEALERS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 08 11 13
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Non fire rated steel doors and frames.
B.
Steel frames for wood doors.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames;
2003 (R2008).
B.
ANSI A250.10 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for
Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2011).
C.
ASTM A653/A653M Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process; 2013.
D.
BHMA A156.115 Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006.
E.
NAAMM HMMA 840 Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors
and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,
reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one
copy of referenced grade standard.
C.
Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and
identifying location of different finishes, if any.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.
B.
Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build up under coverings; prevent corrosion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Requirements for All Doors and Frames:
1. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges.
2. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges.
3. Door Texture: Smooth faces.
4. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in
place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.
5. Galvanizing : All components hot dipped zinc iron alloy coated (galvannealed),
manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
6. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
B.
Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more
than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for
instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound rated must comply with the
requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound rated doors; where two requirements
conflict, comply with the most stringent.
2.02 STEEL DOORS
A.
Interior Doors :
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 1, full flush.
2. Core: Cardboard honeycomb.
June 23, 2014
08 11 13 1
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Building 1100 Cafe
3.
Bid Documents
Galvanizing: All components hot dipped zinc iron alloy coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
2.03 STEEL FRAMES
A.
General:
1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door.
2. Finish: Same as for door.
B.
Interior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled.
1. Galvanizing: All components hot dipped zinc iron alloy coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00.
2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center
mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.
B.
Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory or shop assembled frames.
2.05 FINISH MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Rust inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM
HMMA 840.
B.
Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
C.
Coordinate installation of hardware.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
08 11 13 2
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 08 14 16
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Flush wood doors; flush configuration; non rated.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and
characteristics.
C.
Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling,
blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details.
1. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 4 X 4 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain
color, and sheen.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
B.
Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
C.
Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or
wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with
tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DOORS AND PANELS
A.
All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.
1. Quality Level: Custom Grade, Extra Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with WDMA
I.S.1 A.
2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5 ply unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Interior Doors: 1 3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.
1. Provide solid core doors at all locations .
2.02 DOOR AND PANEL CORES
A.
Non Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and
faces as indicated above.
2.03 DOOR FACINGS
A.
Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Species and cut to match existing building doors,
veneer grade as specified by quality standard, plain sliced, book veneer match, running
assembly match; unless otherwise indicated.
2.04 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A.
Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.
B.
Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:
C.
Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface mounted hardware, in accordance with
hardware requirements and dimensions.
D.
Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge
clearances in accordance with specified quality standard.
1. Exception: Doors to be field finished.
June 23, 2014
08 14 16 1
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Building 1100 Cafe
E.
Bid Documents
Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.
B.
Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.
C.
Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
3.02 TOLERANCES
A.
Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.
B.
Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
B.
Adjust closers for full closure.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
08 14 16 2
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Hardware for wood and hollow steel doors.
B.
Electrically operated and controlled hardware.
C.
Thresholds.
D.
Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
B.
Section 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
BHMA A156.2 American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches;
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2011 (ANSI/BHMA A156.2).
B.
BHMA A156.4 American National Standard for Door Controls Closers; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2008 (ANSI/BHMA A156.4).
C.
BHMA A156.18 American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2012 (ANSI/BHMA A156.18).
D.
UL (BMD) Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware
will be installed.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog literature for each type of hardware, marked to clearly
show products to be furnished for this project.
C.
Hardware Schedule: Detailed listing of each item of hardware to be installed on each door. Use
door numbering scheme as included in the Contract Documents. Identify electrically operated
items and include power requirements.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DOOR HARDWARE + GENERAL
A.
Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with
applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated.
B.
Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer.
C.
Provide products that comply with the following:
1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.
2. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
D.
Electrically Operated and/or Controlled Hardware: Provide all power supplies, power transfer
hinges, relays, and interfaces required for proper operation; provide wiring between hardware
and control components and to building power connection.
E.
Finishes: All door hardware the same finish unless otherwise indicated.
1. Primary Finish: Satin chrome plated over nickel on brass or bronze, 626 (approx US26D).
2. Secondary Finish: Satin chrome plated over nickel on brass or bronze, 626 (approx
US26D).
June 23, 2014
08 71 00 1
DOOR HARDWARE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
a.
3.
4.
Use secondary finish in kitchens, bathrooms, and other spaces containing chrome or
stainless steel finished appliances, fittings, and equipment; provide primary finish on
one side of door and secondary finish on other side if necessary.
Finish Definitions: BHMA A156.18.
Exceptions:
a. Where base metal is specified to be different, provide finish that is an appearance
equivalent according to BHMA A156.18.
2.02 HINGES
A.
Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door.
1. Provide five knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide ball bearing hinges at all doors having closers.
3. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated.
4. Provide non removable pins on exterior outswinging doors.
B.
Quantity of Hinges Per Door:
1. Doors From 60 inches High up to 90 inches High: Three hinges.
2.03 LOCKS AND LATCHES
A.
Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking.
1. Hardware Sets indicate locking functions required for each door.
2. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset.
3. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to
have no outside trim.
B.
Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically indicated
"push/pull" or "not required to latch".
2.04 CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS
A.
Locking Functions: As defined in BHMA A156.2, and as follows:
1. Classroom: F84, key required to lock.
B.
Manufacturers Cylindrical Locksets:
1. Schlage, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us.
a. AL25D Saturn.
2. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.05 FLUSHBOLTS
A.
Flushbolts: Lever extension bolts in leading edge of door, one bolt into floor, one bolt into top of
frame.
1. Pairs of Swing Doors: At inactive leaves, provide flush bolts of type as required to comply
with code.
2. Floor Bolts: Provide dustproof strike except at metal thresholds.
B.
Manual Flushbolts: Provide lever extensions for top bolt at over size doors.
2.06 CLOSERS
A.
Closers: Complying with BHMA A156.4.
1. Provide surface mounted, door mounted closers unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide a door closer on every exterior door.
B.
Manufacturers Closers:
1. LCN, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us.
a. LCN 4041.
2. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.07 PROTECTION PLATES AND ARCHITECTURAL TRIM
A.
Protection Plates:
1. Kickplate: Provide on push side of every door, except storefront and all glass doors.
June 23, 2014
08 71 00 2
DOOR HARDWARE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire rated doors and frames are
present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
B.
Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct
characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.
B.
Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C.
Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in
Schedule, unless otherwise noted:
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 70 00.
B.
Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
HARDWARE SETS
4.01 SWING DOORS ++ NOT REQUIRING KEY LOCKING
A.
HW
1.
2.
3.
1: Latchset, Non Fire Rated.
AL25D Saturn.
Closer with overhead stop/hold open.
Kickplate.
4.02 SWING DOORS ++ KEY REQUIRED TO LOCK, MAY BE LEFT UNLOCKED
A.
HW
1.
2.
3.
4.
20: Classroom Lock, Non Fire Rated:
AL25D Saturn.
Kickplate.
Lockset, Classroom.
Pair: One leaf inactive, with manual flush bolts.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
08 71 00 3
DOOR HARDWARE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 09 21 16
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Metal stud wall framing.
B.
Metal channel ceiling framing.
C.
Cementitious backing board.
D.
Gypsum wallboard.
E.
Joint treatment and accessories.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A108.11 American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer
Units; 2013.1.
B.
ASTM C475/C475M Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing
Gypsum Board; 2012.
C.
ASTM C645 Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2013.
D.
ASTM C754 Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2011.
E.
ASTM C840 Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.
F.
ASTM C954 Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel
Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)
in Thickness; 2011.
G.
ASTM C1002 Standard Specification for Steel Self Piercing Tapping Screws for the
Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs;
2007 (Reapproved 2013).
H.
ASTM C1396/C1396M Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2013.
I.
ASTM D3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.
J.
GA 216 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2013.
K.
GA 226 Application of Gypsum Board to Form Curved Surfaces; Gypsum Association; 2008.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing
system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A.
Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA 216.
2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS
A.
Non Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size
and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum
deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf.
1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.
2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.
3. Ceiling Channels: C shaped.
B.
Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.
June 23, 2014
09 21 16 1
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Building 1100 Cafe
C.
Bid Documents
Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of
sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and fastened as
indicated on drawings.
2.03 BOARD MATERIALS
A.
Gypsum Wallboard: Paper faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to
minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. Thickness:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.
b. Ceilings: 1/2 inch.
B.
Backing Board For Non Wet Areas: Water resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTM
C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: All interior wall surfaces behind FRP wall panels.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. Regular Board Thickness: 5/8 inch.
4. Edges: Tapered.
C.
Ceiling Board: Special sag resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M;
sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
3. Edges: Tapered.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project
conditions.
B.
High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex based coating for spray application, designed to
take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish.
C.
Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood
Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self piercing tapping type; cadmium plated for
exterior locations.
D.
Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954;
steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A.
Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated.
C.
Studs: Space studs as permitted by standard.
1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations.
2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain
clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with
continuous bridging.
D.
Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of:
1. Wall mounted cabinets and shelving.
2. Television brackets.
June 23, 2014
09 21 16 2
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840, GA 216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end
joints, especially in highly visible locations.
B.
Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate where
indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board .
D.
Curved Surfaces: Apply gypsum board to curved substrates in accordance with GA 226.
3.04 JOINT TREATMENT
A.
Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:
1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish and other areas specifically indicated.
2. Level 0: Temporary partitions and surfaces indicated to be finished in later stage of
project.
B.
Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to
receive finishes.
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
C.
Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface
after joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark free finish.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
09 21 16 3
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 09 30 00
TILING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Tile for floor applications.
B.
Tile for wall applications.
C.
Cementitious backer board as tile substrate.
D.
Ceramic accessories.
E.
Ceramic trim.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 90 05 Joint Sealers.
B.
Section 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies: Installation of tile backer board.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of
Ceramic Tile Version; 2013.1.
B.
ANSI A108.1A American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in
the Wet Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.
C.
ANSI A108.1B American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a
Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar;
2013.1.
D.
ANSI A108.1C Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the
Wet Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured
Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.
E.
ANSI A108.4 American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2013.1.
F.
ANSI A108.5 American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Dry Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.
G.
ANSI A108.6 American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy; 2013.1.
H.
ANSI A108.8 American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 2013.1.
I.
ANSI A108.9 American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 2013.1.
J.
ANSI A108.10 American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework;
2013.1.
K.
ANSI A108.11 American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of
Cementitious Backer Units; 2013.1.
L.
ANSI A108.12 American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.
M. ANSI A108.13 American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Load Bearing,
Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2013.1.
N.
ANSI A118.3 American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water
Cleanable Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive;
2013.1.
O.
ANSI A118.9 American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications
for Cementitious Backer Units; 2013.1.
June 23, 2014
09 30 00 1
TILING
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
P.
ANSI A118.12 American National Standard Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes for
Thin Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation; 2013.1.
Q.
TCNA (HB) Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2013.1.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories.
Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.
C.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
D.
Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal
methods, and polishes and waxes.
E.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Tile: 10 square feet of each size, color, and surface finish combination.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 and TCNA (HB) on site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE
A.
See finish schedule in drawings.
1. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same
manufacturer as tile.
B.
Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in
sizes coordinated with field tile.
1. Applications: Use in the following locations:
a. Open Edges: Bullnose.
b. Inside Corners: Jointed.
c. Floor to Wall Joints: Cove base.
2. Manufacturer: Same as for tile.
2.03 SETTING MATERIALS
A.
Provide setting materials made by the same manufacturer as grout.
B.
Epoxy Adhesive and Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.3.
2.04 GROUTS
A.
Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3 chemical resistant and water cleanable epoxy grout.
1. Applications: Where indicated.
B.
Tile Sealant: Gunnable, silicone, siliconized acrylic, or urethane sealant; moisture and mildew
resistant type.
1. Applications: Between tile and plumbing fixtures.
2.05 THIN'SET ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Concrete Floor Slab Crack Isolation Membrane: Material complying with ANSI A118.12; not
intended as waterproofing.
1. Thickness: 20 mils, maximum.
2. Crack Resistance: No failure at 1/16 inch gap, minimum.
B.
Backer Board: Cementitious type complying with ANSI A118.9; high density, glass fiber
reinforced, 1/2 inch thick; 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners.
June 23, 2014
09 30 00 2
TILING
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,
are dust free, and are ready to receive tile.
B.
Verify that concrete sub floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture
emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended
by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer.
C.
Verify that required floor mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Protect surrounding work from damage.
B.
Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
C.
Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable
flatness tolerances.
D.
Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions.
Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge.
3.03 INSTALLATION ' GENERAL
A.
Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1A thru A108.13,
manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations.
B.
Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
C.
Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases
neatly. Align floor joints.
D.
Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout
joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.
E.
Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.
F.
Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings.
G.
Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
H.
Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
I.
Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.
J.
Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.
K.
Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.
3.04 INSTALLATION ' FLOORS ' THIN'SET METHODS
A.
Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F113, dry set or
latex Portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use uncoupling membrane under all tile unless other underlayment is indicated.
2. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCNA (HB)
Method F131.
3.05 INSTALLATION ' WALL TILE
A.
Over cementitious backer units install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W223, organic
adhesive.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Clean tile and grout surfaces.
3.07 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
09 30 00 3
TILING
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 09 51 00
SUSPENDED CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B.
Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) ceiling panels.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C635/C635M Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of
Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay in Panel Ceilings; 2013a.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and FRP ceiling panels.
C.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CEILING PANELS
A.
Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) ceiling panels:
1. General: ASTM E 84, Class A
2. Size: 24 x 24 inches.
3. Nominal thickness: 0.10 inch.
4. Finish: Smooth.
5. Color: White.
2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)
A.
Suspension Systems General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlocking
components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as
required.
B.
Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled;
intermediate duty.
1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face.
2. Finish: White painted.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic
requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.
B.
Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.
1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of
grid.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION ' SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A.
Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum
deflection of 1:360.
B.
Lay out system to a balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical
unit size.
C.
Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other
work.
June 23, 2014
09 51 00 1
SUSPENDED CEILINGS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
D.
Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where
carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
E.
Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest
affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
F.
Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load
to exceed deflection capability.
G.
Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or
support components independently.
H.
Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
I.
Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with
other interruptions.
1. Use longest practical lengths.
2. Overlap and rivet corners.
3.02 INSTALLATION ' PANEL UNITS
A.
Install panel units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Fit panel units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance
and function.
C.
Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.
D.
Install units after above ceiling work is complete.
E.
Install panel units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.
F.
Cutting Panel Units:
1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.
2. Perform cutting operations in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
G.
Install hold down clips on each panel to retain panels tight to grid system.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
09 51 00 2
SUSPENDED CEILINGS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 09 65 00
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Resilient base.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM F1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008 (Reapproved 2012).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
C.
Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial
selection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 RESILIENT BASE
A.
Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove,
and as follows:
1. Height: 6 inch.
2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick.
3. Finish: Satin.
4. Length: Roll.
5. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
C.
Fit joints tightly.
3.02 RESILIENT BASE
A.
Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.
B.
Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
3.03 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B.
Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
09 65 00 1
RESILIENT FLOORING
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 09 77 33
GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Glass fiber reinforced plastic panels.
B.
Trim.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM D256 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of
Plastics; 2010.
B.
ASTM D2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of
Barcol Impressor; 2013a.
C.
ASTM D3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.
D.
ASTM D5319 Standard Specification for Glass Fiber Reinforced Polyester Wall and Ceiling
Panels; 2012.
E.
ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples 2 by 2 inch in size illustrating material and surface design of
panels.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PANEL SYSTEMS
A.
Wall Panels :
1. Panel Size: 4 by 8 feet (1219 mm by 2438 mm).
2. Panel Thickness: 0.090 inch (2.3 mm).
3. Surface Design: Embossed.
4. Color: White.
5. Attachment Method: Adhesive only, with trim and sealant in joints.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Panels: Glass fiber reinforced plastic, complying with ASTM D5319.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame Spread Index of 25, maximum; Smoke Developed
Index of 450, maximum; when whole system is tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. Scratch Resistance: Barcol hardness score of not less than 40, when tested in
accordance with ASTM D2583.
4. Impact Strength: Not less than 12 ft lbs/in, when tested in accordance with ASTM D256.
B.
Trim: Vinyl; color coordinating with panel.
C.
Adhesive: Type recommended by panel manufacturer.
D.
Sealant: Type recommended by panel manufacturer; white.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions and substrate flatness before starting work.
B.
Verify that substrate conditions are ready to receive the work of this section.
June 23, 2014
PANELS
09 77 33 1
GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
3.02 INSTALLATION % WALLS
A.
Install panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Cut and drill panels with carbide tipped saw blades or drill bits, or cut with snips.
C.
Apply adhesive to the back side of the panel using trowel recommended by adhesive
manufacturer.
D.
Apply panels to wall with seams plumb and pattern aligned with adjoining panels.
E.
Install panels with manufacturer's recommended gap for panel field and corner joints.
F.
Place trim on panel before fastening edges, if required.
G.
Fill channels in trim with sealant before attaching to panel.
H.
Install trim with adhesive and screws or nails as required.
I.
Seal gaps at floor, ceiling, and between panels with specified sealant to prevent moisture
intrusion.
J.
Remove excess sealant as paneling is installed.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
PANELS
09 77 33 2
GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 09 90 00
PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Surface preparation.
B.
Field application of paints.
C.
Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory finished and
unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having
factory applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of
equipment.
5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.
6. Ceramic and other tiles.
7. Brick, architectural concrete, cast stone, integrally colored plaster and stucco.
8. Concrete masonry in utility, mechanical, and electrical spaces.
9. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
40 CFR 59, Subpart D National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for
each:
1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category
(e.g. "alkyd enamel").
2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).
3. Cross reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of
each system.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B.
Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
C.
Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90
degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B.
Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C.
Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid height at substrate surface.
June 23, 2014
09 90 00 1
PAINTING AND COATING
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same
manufacturer; no exceptions.
B.
Paints:
1. Sherwin Williams Company: www.sherwin williams.com.
C.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS ( GENERAL
A.
Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,
and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a
single production run.
3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure
is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B.
Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use
primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
C.
Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the
following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added
at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Colors: As indicated on drawings
1. Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract.
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS ( INTERIOR
A.
Paint I OP All Interior Surfaces Indicated to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including
gypsum board.
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
2. Eggshell: MPI gloss level 3; use this sheen at dining area walls.
3. Gloss: MPI gloss level 6; use this sheen at kitchen and storage room walls.
4. Top Coat Product(s):
a. Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex.
5. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats.
B.
Paint I OP MD DT Medium Duty Door/Trim: For surfaces subject to frequent contact by
occupants, including metals:
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
2. Top Coat(s): MPI Interior Epoxy Modified Latex; MPI #115, 215.
3. Gloss: MPI gloss level 6; use this sheen at all locations.
C.
Paint I TR FL Transparent Finish on Wood Floors:
1. 2 top coats over stain.
2. Stain: MPI Semi Transparent Stain for Wood; MPI #90.
3. Top Coat(s): MPI Polyurethane Varnish, Moisture Cured, Gloss; MPI #31.
4. Gloss: MPI gloss level 6; use this sheen at all locations.
June 23, 2014
09 90 00 2
PAINTING AND COATING
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C.
Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.
D.
Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
E.
Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
F.
Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra sodium phosphate
and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
G.
Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime
defects after repair.
H.
Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with
solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
I.
Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC SP 2 (hand tool
cleaning) or SSPC SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC SP 1 (solvent cleaning).
J.
Shop Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer
and rust. Feather edges to make touch up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with
solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re prime entire shop primed item.
K.
Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing,
seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer
has dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25
percent with thinner.
L.
Wood Doors to be Field Finished: Seal wood door top and bottom edge surfaces with clear
sealer.
M. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.
3.02 APPLICATION
A.
Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
applied.
C.
Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
D.
Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
E.
Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior
to applying next coat.
F.
Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain
before set. Wipe excess from surface.
G.
Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
09 90 00 3
PAINTING AND COATING
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 11 40 00
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Food service equipment.
B.
Connections to utilities.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 90 05 Joint Sealers.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.
B.
Kitchen Equipment Contractor (KEC) to provide qualified site foreman for the duration of the
installation.
C.
All installation and permitting for the fire protection system is the responsibility of the KEC.
D.
The KEC is also responsible for equipment storage until the site is ready for delivery. Storage
facility must be properly insured.
E.
Pricing to include any price protection required. All equipment freight to be included in pricing.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on appliances; indicate configuration, sizes, materials, finishes,
locations, and utility service connection locations, service characteristics, and wiring diagrams.
C.
Shop Drawings: Complete floor plans, elevations, cross sections, and construction details for
all fabricated units; include:
1. Layout and anchorage of equipment and accessories, including clearances for
maintenance and operation and required electrical or plumbing connections.
2. Size, type, and location of equipment drain lines and floor drains.
3. Special conditions, including required slab depressions, cores, wall openings, blockouts,
ceiling pockets, access panels, and above ceiling hanger assemblies.
4. Wiring, piping, and schematic diagrams.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples, 4 x 4 inch in size illustrating quartz counter finish. Finish to be
selected from manufacturer's full range.
E.
Operation Data: Provide operating data for the specified equipment .
F.
Maintenance Data: Provide lubrication and periodic maintenance requirement schedules .
G.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Food Service Equipment:
1. Refer to Food Service Equipment Schedule.
2. Substitutions: Not permitted.
June 23, 2014
11 40 00 1
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A.
Equipment Schedule: Refer to schedule at end of this section.
B.
Installation Accessories: Provide all rough in hardware, supports and connections, attachment
devices, closure trim, and accessories required for complete installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify ventilation outlets, service connections, and supports are correct and in required location.
B.
Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B.
Provide all labor and materials to deliver, uncrate, and set in place all equipment listed in these
written specifications. Removal of all trash/crating is the responsibility of the Contractor. The
KEC is also responsible for equipment storage until the site is ready for delivery. Storage facility
must be properly insured.
C.
Insulate to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals.
D.
Provide sealant to achieve clean joint with adjacent building finishes and between abutting
components.
E.
KEC to hang hoods and install all s/s wall covering from the bottom of the hood to the floor. KEC
is also responsible for installation of hood skirt.
3.03 EXISTING EQUIPMENT
A.
Obtain, move, store, and re install equipment, ready for utility connection.
B.
Do work in cooperation with Owner so that normal function of services is minimally interrupted.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust equipment and apparatus to ensure proper working order and conditions.
B.
Remove and replace equipment creating excessive noise or vibration.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Remove masking or protective covering from stainless steel and other finished surfaces.
B.
Wash and clean equipment.
C.
Polish glass, plastic, hardware, accessories, fixtures, and fittings.
3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A.
At completion of work, provide qualified and trained personnel to demonstrate operation of each
item of equipment and instruct Owner in operating procedures and maintenance.
1. Test equipment prior to demonstration.
3.07 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to Section 11 40 00.01 Food Service Equipment Schedule.
1. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities,
sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
2. Cord and Plug: Provide suitable length of three wire cord with plugs to match building
receptacles.
3. Provide internal wiring for equipment, including electrical devices, wiring controls, and
switches to a common junction box.
4. Provide lamps for fixtures in equipment.
5. Provide equipment with connection terminals, so that connections for services can be
made. Where receptacles are specified for custom equipment, supply cut outs and outlet
boxes set in place and accessible for connection to electrical source.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
11 40 00 2
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 11 40 00.01
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Item No. 1 %
Reach%in Refrigerator, 1 section
(1 REQ'D)
Delfield Model SSR1 S
Specification Line Series® Refrigerator, Reach in, single section, 24.96 cubic feet, self
contained refrigeration 404A, digital thermometer, (3) chrome plated wire shelves,
built in locks, recessed metal door handle, pressure relief valve, solid hinged full height
door, STAINLESS STEEL interior door liners, stainless steel exterior & interior,
stainless steel breaker strips, top mounted compressor, 6" adjustable stainless steel
legs, cUL, UL, NSF, ENERGY STAR®, 1/4 hp
Accessories:
1 ea
115v/60/1, 6.0 amps, NEMA 5 15P, standard
1 ea
(3) Year parts & labor warranty, standard (USA)
1 ea
(5) Year compressor warranty standard
1 ea
Self contained refrigeration system, standard
1 ea
Door hinged on left
1 ea
6" polyurethane casters in lieu of standard legs
12 ea
Universal Bottom Support Tray Slide, for 18" x 26" pans or 12" x 20",
per pair
Item No. 2 %
Work Table
(2 REQ'D)
Select Stainless Products Model 6SUB 30
Work Table, 72"W x 30"D, 16/300 stainless steel top with 5" backsplash, 16 gauge
stainless steel undershelf & 16 gauge stainless steel legs & adjustable stainless steel
feet, all welded construction, NSF
Accessories:
2 ea
Fabricated Sink Bowl, 18" front to back x 16" wide x 12" deep, 16/300
stainless steel
2 ea
Faucet, splash mount, 8" centers, 8" long
2 ea
Cut out in undershelf, 3" dia.
2 ea
Drawer, 20" x 20" x 5", stainless steel pan (Flyer)
Item No. 3 %
Overshelf, Wall%Mounted
(4 REQ'D)
Select Stainless Products Model 6WS 12
Shelf, wall mount, 12" x 72", ends turned down, back turned up 2", 16/300 stainless
steel
Item No. 4 %
Reach%in Undercounter Refrigerator, 2 section
(2 REQ'D)
Delfield Model UC4448N
Undercounter Refrigerator, Reduced Height, two section, 48" W, 16.0 cubic feet, (2)
doors, (2) 1/1 GN shelves, stainless steel top, front & sides, stainless steel interior, 3" casters,
front breathing rear mounted refrigeration system, 1/5 hp, cUL, UL, NSF
Accessories:
2 ea
115v/60/1 ph, 3.9 amps, NEMA 5 15P, standard
2 ea
(3) Year parts & labor warranty standard
2 ea
Self contained refrigeration, standard
2 ea
(5) Year compressor warranty standard
June 23, 2014
11 40 00.01 1
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Building 1100 Café
Item No. 5 %
Kettle / Pot Filler Faucets
Bid Documents
(1 REQ'D)
T&S Brass Model B 0605 H
Kettle Pot Filler, wall mount, vacuum breaker, stainless steel hose, self closing hook
nozzle, red index
Item No. 6 %
Range, 36", 6 Open Burners
(1 REQ'D)
Garland/US Range Model U36 6R
U Series Restaurant Range, gas, 36" W, (6) 32,000 BTU open burners, with cast iron
top & ring grates, standard oven with 3 position rack guides with oven rack, stainless
steel front, sides, plate rail, 2 piece back guard and shelf, 6" stainless steel legs with
adjustable feet, 230,000 BTU (US Range)
Accessories:
1 ea
One year limited parts and labor warranty, covers products purchased
and installed in the USA only, standard
1 ea
Natural gas, specify elevation if over 2,000 ft
1 ea
Stainless steel 2 piece back guard an shelf, standard
1 ea
Adjustable height swivel casters, set of 4 with front brakes
Item No.
7%
Kettle, Gas, Table Top
(1 REQ'D)
Cleveland Range Model KGT 12 T
Kettle, Gas, Table Top, Tilting, 12 gallon capacity, 2/3 steam jacket design, stainless
steel construction, support console on right
Accessories:
1 ea
1 year limited warranty, standard
1 ea
Natural Gas
1 ea
115v/60/1 ph, 5.0 amp, electronic ignition, cord & plug for controls,
standard
1 ea
Lift off cover 12 gallon, per each kettle
1 ea
Double Pantry Faucet, with swing spout & mounting bracket for tilting
kettles
1 ea
Equipment Stand, for single kettles only, open base with sliding drain
drawer & splash screen, 28" x 26", 18" high, stainless steel top and
legs, allows unit to be hard piped to a floor drain
1 ea
Retractable splash guard/pan shelf, for drain drawer, for ST28
Item No. 8 %
Hood and Fire System
(1 REQ'D)
Custom Model HOOD & FIRE SYSTEM
Hood, exhaust and intake air package and fire system as custom fabricated by
Captive Aire. See Captive Aire drawings for complete details. KEC is responsible for
hanging of hood, installation of s/s wall covering and installation of skirt above hood.
KEC to coordinate fire system demonstration. Hood package to consist of: Item 8:
5424 2 PSP F 10' 6" lonh Exhaust only wall canopy hood with front perforated supply
plenum, 3" back stand off,430 S/S where exposed,fire cabinet onthe right side of the
hood,16"x16"s/scaptrate solo filter (7) with hook, ETL listed. Particulate capture
efficency: 93% efficient@ 9microns, 72% efficient @ 5 microns. L55 series canopy
light fixture (3) high temp assembly, includes clear thermal and shock resistant globe
(L55 fixture), bulbs provided by KEC. 1 ea 10"x22" exhaust riser, 3 ea supply riser with
volumn dampers, 2 ea 1/2 pint grease cup (new style). Field wrapper 18" high, front
left& right side. KEC to verify height requirement. KEC to mount backsplash; 80" x
138" complete with end caps and divider bars. Electrical package mounted in cabinet
June 23, 2014
11 40 00.01 2
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
at factory. Fire system 1: Ansul 3.0/1.5 Ansul 4.5 gallon fire system in utility cabinet
(includes prepiped hood with detection, tanks release mechanism, microswithhes and
pull station). GAS VALVE (2") provided by Distributor. FAN #1: NCA!^HPFA high
pressure belt drive upblast fan with 18.75" wheel. Exhaust fan to handle 2350 CFM @
1.500" wc ESP, fan runs @ 1295 RPM. Exhaust motor: 1.5 HP,3 phase, 208 volt, 4.7
FLA open drip proof. Grease cup for kitchen duty centrifugal exhaust fans.Box
dimensions 15 3/4" x 5 1/16" x 3 3/4" high. Curb #CRB26.5x20E on fan #1(flat curb).
Hinge kit for exhaust fan roof curb is included. vented base for curb is included. FAN #
2: Exhaust fan #NCA8FA belt drive centrifugal upblast exhaust fan with 11.75" wheel.
fan handles 540 cfm@ 0.750 wc ESP, fan runs @1289 RPM. exhaust motor:
0.500HP,3 phase,208 volt, 1.8 FLA, open drip proof. Grease cup for kitchen only
centrifugal exhaust fans. Box
dimensions 15 3/4" x 5 1/16" x 3 3/4" high.Curb #
CRB19.5X22L BTC
included. Hinge kit also included. Vented base for curb. Fan
#3: Model # A1 D.250 G10 direct natural gas fired heated make up air unit with 10"
blower. Supply fan handles 1880 CFM @ 0.375 wc ESP, Fat runs at 944
RPM.
Heater supplies 111672 BTU's. 55 degree temp rise. Supply motor 1.000HP, 3 phase,
208 volt, 3.3 FLA, open drip proofDown discharge air flow RIGHT TO LEFT.
Slopedfiltered intake for size #1 modular heater: 21.813" x 44.375 x 23.375 high.
includes 2" MV EZ Kleen metal mesh filters. RTC Solutions 40 90 degree discharge
temp control is provided. Gas manifold for DF1 GM BTU 0 550001 7 in wc 14 in wc.
No insurance requirement (ANSI) BV250 66. Motorized back draft damper 16"x18"
for size 1 standard and modular direct fired heaters w/extended shaft, standard
galvanized construction 3/4" rear flange,LF120Sactuator is included. Cooling interlock
relayn (24vac coil) 120 volt contacts for lock out of burner circuit when AC is
energized. Low fire start included. 2 eacg gas pressure guages included. Curb #
CRB21x71x20INS insulated on fan # 3 flat curb. Electrical system #1: SC 321110FP 3
phase w/2 exhaust fans, 1 supply fan, exhaust "on" infirs, fans( on/off
thermostaticallycontrolled.Room temperature sensor shipped loose for field installation
includes two duct thermostat kits. Digital prewire lighting relay kit includes hood lighting
relay & terminal blocks. Allows for up to 1400 watts of lighting each. Thermistor cable
(50') is included. Upgrade to #DCV 2111 demand control ventillation package is
required. FACTORY SERVICES for verification of direct fired heater, (2) exhaust fans,
hood, standard control package including mileage is required.
Item No. 9 %
Combi Oven, Gas, Half Size
(1 REQ'D)
Rational Model A619206.27E202
(CMP 61NG) CombiMaster® Plus, Combination Oven/Steamer, half size, natural gas,
hand shower with automatic retracting system, hinging rack 2 5/8" (6 x 12" x 20" or 6
x 13" x 18"), interface USB, 120v/60/1 ph, 8cord, NEMA 5 15P, 49,000 BTU
Accessories:
1 ea
NOTE: All discounts subject to approval by manufacturer
1 ea
2 years parts and labor warranty
1 ea
RCI Rational Certified Installation, new certified installation cost for a
tabletop model is $1000 for the first unit (61/62/101/102) THIS ITEM IS
NON DISCOUNTABLE, USA ONLY (NET)
1 ea
Installation Kit, for gas SCC WE/CM P 101G (120/60/1ph); gas SCC
WE/CM P 62G (208 240/60/1ph); gas SCC WE/CM P 61G
(120/60/1ph)THIS ITEM IS NON DISCOUNTABLE, USA ONLY (NET)
1 ea
Chef Assistance Program, a RATIONAL certified Chef conducts 4
hours/location specialized application training with personnel, no
charge
1 ea
Door hinged on right std.
1 ea
UG II Mobile Oven Stand, 14 supporting rails, side panels, rear panel
June 23, 2014
11 40 00.01 3
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
and cover, height 26 3/8" for SCC 61/CM 101 series
Gastronorm Super Spike Chicken Grid, 1/1 size, 12" x 20", (6 bird 4
lbs max weight each)
Gastronorm Super Spike Chicken Grid, 1/1 size, 12" x 20", (8 bird 2.9
lbs max weight each)
2 ea
2 ea
Item No. 9a %
Water Filter Assembly
(1 REQ'D)
Everpure Model EV9797 22
KleenSteam® II Twin Water Filter System, total system for boiler base steamers, 5.0
gpm flow rate, deliming, (2) 7CB5 carbon filter, SS 10 scale inhibitor Cartridge, dip
tube, pressure gauge, water shut off valve & wall bracket
Accessories:
1 ea
7CB5 Cartridge, 6 pack (The price stated here is per each Cartridge.
The EV part number reflects a pack of 6)
1 ea
ScaleStick® with HydroBlend™ compound, scale inhibition,
phosphate, translucent Cartridge, fits all current SR X housings &
standard 10" housings, 12 pack
Item No. 10 %
Spare No.
Item No. 11 %
Shelving Unit, Wire
(1 REQ'D)
Eagle Group Model S4 74 1836VG
Starter Shelving Units, (4) 18"W x 36"L wire shelves with patented QuadTruss®
design, (4) 74" post, Valu Gard® green epoxy finish, NSF
Item No. 11a %
Caster
(2 REQ'D)
Eagle Group Model CSS5 300
Stem Caster, Swivel, 5" wheel diameter, 1 1/4" wheel face, 300 lb. capacity, resilient
tread, donut bumper included, EAGLEbrite® zinc, NSF
Item No. 11b %
Caster
(2 REQ'D)
Eagle Group Model CSB5 300
Stem Caster with Brake, 5" wheel diameter, 1 1/4" wheel face, 300 lb. capacity,
resilient tread, donut bumper included, EAGLEbrite® zinc, NSF
Item No.
12 %
Pizza Oven, Deck%Type Gas
(1 REQ'D)
Bakers Pride Model FC 516/D 125
Il Forno Classico® Pizza Oven, double stacked with D 125, wood burning style, gas,
65 1/4"W x 36" D deck, with ceramic decks, top oven only has brick lining standard,
650°F thermostat, stainless steel exterior, painted legs, 265,000 BTU, 41.03 KW
Accessories:
1 ea
Two year parts & labor warranty standard
1 ea
Gas type to be determined
1 ea
(2) 115v/60/1 ph, NEMA 5 15P
1 ea
Il Forno Classico® Exhaust Hood, eyebrow style, mount on single
oven stacked on deck oven, grease gutter with removable grease cup,
stainless steel baffle filter on 45°, oven vent connection, stainless steel
construction, with out fire damper, (Ready to accept Fire Suppression
piping), UL, NSF & NFPA 96
June 23, 2014
11 40 00.01 4
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Building 1100 Café
Item No. 13 %
Hood, Fire & Exhaust
Bid Documents
(1 REQ'D)
Bakers Pride Model EYEBROW HOOD
Included in Item #12.
Item No. 14 %
Filler Table
(1 REQ'D)
Custom Model FILLER TABLE
Custom filler table as manufactured by Select Stainless. Unit is triangular in shape and
features a butcher block top and s/s cabinet base with intermediate and base interior
shelf.
Item No. 15 %
Sink, Hand
(2 REQ'D)
Eagle Group Model HSA 10 FOE
Hand Sink, wall mount, 14" wide x 10" front to back x 5" deep bowl, 304 stainless steel
construction, electronic eye gooseneck spout, polymer lever drain with overflow,
deep drawn positive drain sink bowl, 7 1/2" high backsplash, all welded, includes
mounting brackets, inverted "V" edge, NSF
Accessories:
2 ea
12 volt adaptor, 120/60/1
Item No. 16 %
Shelving Unit, Wire
(1 REQ'D)
Eagle Group Model S4 74 1848VG
Starter Shelving Units, (4) 18"W x 48"L wire shelves with patented QuadTruss®
design, (4) 74" post, Valu Gard® green epoxy finish, NSF
Item No. 16a %
Caster
(2 REQ'D)
Eagle Group Model CSS5 300
Stem Caster, Swivel, 5" wheel diameter, 1 1/4" wheel face, 300 lb. capacity, resilient
tread, donut bumper included, EAGLEbrite® zinc, NSF
Item No. 16b %
Caster
(2 REQ'D)
Eagle Group Model CSB5 300
Stem Caster with Brake, 5" wheel diameter, 1 1/4" wheel face, 300 lb. capacity,
resilient tread, donut bumper included, EAGLEbrite® zinc, NSF
Item No. 17 %
Pizza Prep Table Refrigerated
(1 REQ'D)
Delfield Model 18648PTBM
Refrigerated Pizza Table, single section, 48" W, 8.39 cubic feet, (6) pan capacity, (1)
shelf, (1) 27" door, stainless steel top with refrigerated pan rail, stainless steel ends, 6"
casters, side mounted (HFC 404A) refrigeration system, 1/4 hp, cUL, UL, NSF 7
Accessories:
1 ea
115v/60/1 ph, 10 amps, NEMA 5 15P, standard
1 ea
(3) Year parts & labor warranty standard
1 ea
Self contained refrigeration system, standard
1 ea
(5) Year compressor warranty standard
1 ea
Cutting board, 20" wide x 1/2" thick, composite
Item No.
18 %
June 23, 2014
Overshelf, Wall%Mounted
11 40 00.01 5
(2 REQ'D)
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
Select Stainless Products Model 4WS 12
Shelf, wall mount, 12" x 48", ends turned down, back turned up 2", 16/300 stainless
steel
Item No.
19 %
Pizza Dough Press
(1 REQ'D)
DoughXpress Model DM 18 120
(61146) Economy Pizza Dough Press, manual, clamshell design, up to 18" diameter,
uncoated upper & lower aluminum platens, upper platen heats up to 200° F, digital
timer & temperature controls, infinite range thickness adjustment, illuminated power
on/off switch, heat indicator light, appliance white finish, 1150 watts, 9.8 amps,
120v/60/1 ph, NEMA 5 15P, cETLus
Accessories:
1 ea
Xylan coated platens
Item No. 20 %
Spare No.
Item No.
Work Table
21 %
(1 REQ'D)
Select Stainless Products Model 6SUB 36
Work Table, 72"W x 36"D, 16/300 stainless steel top with 5" backsplash, 16 gauge
stainless steel undershelf & 16 gauge stainless steel legs & adjustable stainless steel
feet, all welded construction, NSF
Accessories:
1 ea
Drawer, 20" x 20" x 5", stainless steel pan (Flyer)
6 st
Pan Rack Slides, stainless steel (priced per set of 2)
1 st
Casters, set of 4, 5", (2 with brakes) (Flyer)
Item No. 22 %
Overshelf, Wall%Mounted
(2 REQ'D)
Select Stainless Products Model 4WS 12
Shelf, wall mount, 12" x 48", ends turned down, back turned up 2", 16/300 stainless
steel
Item No.
23 %
Proofer Holding Cabinet, Mobile
(1 REQ'D)
Metro Model C539 CDC L
C5™ 3 Series Heated Holding & Proofing Cabinet, with Red Insulation Armour™,
mobile, full height, insulated, dutch clear polycarbonate doors, removable bottom
mount control module, thermostat to 200ºF, lip load slides on 1 1/2" centers (35) 18" x
26" pan capacity, 5" casters (two with brakes), aluminum, 120v/60/1 ph, 2000 watts,
16.7 amps, NEMA 5 20P, UL, CUL, NSF
Item No. 24 %
Work Table
(1 REQ'D)
Select Stainless Products Model 6MTSLBES 36
Work Table, with 4" riser, 72"W x 36"D, 1 3/4" thick maple top, 16/300 stainless steel
legs & crossrails, adjustable stainless steel feet, all welded construction, NSF
Item No.
25 %
Ingredient Bin
(4 REQ'D)
Cambro Model IBS20148
Ingredient Bin, mobile, 21 gallon capacity, 3" casters, molded polyethylene with sliding
cover, S hook on front (scoop NOT included), (4) 3" heavy duty casters (2 front swivel,
June 23, 2014
11 40 00.01 6
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
2 fixed), with bin securely attached to base plate, white, NSF
Item No.
26 %
Overshelf, Wall%Mounted
(2 REQ'D)
Select Stainless Products Model 5WS 12
Shelf, wall mount, 12" x 60", ends turned down, back turned up 2", 16/300 stainless
steel
Item No. 27 %
Mixer, Planetary
(1 REQ'D)
Hobart Model HL300 1STD
Legacy Planetary Mixer, 3/4 hp, 200 240/50/60/3, 30 qt. capacity, three fixed speeds,
gear driven transmission, 15 min. timer, #12 taper attachment hub, manual bowl lift,
bowl guard, stainless steel bowl, "B" beater, "D" whip
Accessories:
1 ea
Standard warranty 1 Year parts, labor & travel time during normal
working hours within the USA
1 ea
30 QT ALUM ED DOUGH ARM
1 ea
BOWL TRUCK
Item No.
28 %
Shelving, Wall%Mounted
(2 REQ'D)
Select Stainless Products Model 5WS 12
Shelf, wall mount, 12" x 60", ends turned down, back turned up 2", 16/300 stainless
steel
Item No.
29 %
Sink, (2) Two Compartment
(1 REQ'D)
Select Stainless Products Model 6SUB 30 PT L
Sink, 2 compartment, with left hand drainboard, 24" front to back x 18" wide x 12"
deep, 16/300 stainless steel bowls, 5" backsplash, inverted V drip edge, poly board,
utensil drawer, stainless steel undershelf & tubular legs with adjustable stainless steel
bullet feet, all welded construction, NSF
Accessories:
1 ea
Heavy Duty Faucet, splash mount, 8" centers, 12" long
Item No. 30 %
Spare No.
Item No. 31 %
Shelving Unit, Wire
(4 REQ'D)
Eagle Group Model S5 74 1836VG
Starter Shelving Units, (5) 18"W x 36"L wire shelves with patented QuadTruss®
design, (4) 74" post, Valu Gard® green epoxy finish, NSF
Item No. 31a %
Shelving Unit, Wire
(4 REQ'D)
Eagle Group Model S5 74 1842VG
Starter Shelving Units, (5) 18"W x 42"L wire shelves with patented QuadTruss®
design, (4) 74" post, Valu Gard® green epoxy finish, NSF
Item No. 31b %
Caster
(16 REQ'D)
Eagle Group Model CSS5 300
Stem Caster, Swivel, 5" wheel diameter, 1 1/4" wheel face, 300 lb. capacity, resilient
June 23, 2014
11 40 00.01 7
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
tread, donut bumper included, EAGLEbrite® zinc, NSF
Item No. 31c %
Caster
(16 REQ'D)
Eagle Group Model CSB5 300
Stem Caster with Brake, 5" wheel diameter, 1 1/4" wheel face, 300 lb. capacity,
resilient tread, donut bumper included, EAGLEbrite® zinc, NSF
Item No. 32 %
Cart, Utility
(1 REQ'D)
Rubbermaid Model FG335588PLAT
Utility Cart, 3 shelves, 31"L x 18"W x 37 1/2"H, smooth surface, handles, enclosed
ends, plastic construction, casters, HACCP, assembly required, (certified to NSF and
USDA), platinum
Item No. 33 %
Mop Sink
(1 REQ'D)
Select Stainless Products Model MS 2028 8
Mop Sink, floor mounted, 20" wide, 28" long, 8" high water level, 3 1/2" drain, 16/300
stainless steel
Accessories:
1 ea
Mop Holder, 3" x 18", holds 3 mops
1 ea
Service Faucet, for mop sink
Item No. 34 %
Mop Bucket Wringer Combination
(1 REQ'D)
Rubbermaid Model FG618688YEL
WaveBrake® Mopping System, side press, wringer, holds up to 44 quarts, foot pedal,
50,000 ringing cycles, steel, plastic, yellow
Item No. 35 %
Shelving Unit, Wire
(1 REQ'D)
Eagle Group Model S5 74 1824VG
Starter Shelving Units, (5) 18"W x 24"L wire shelves with patented QuadTruss®
design, (4) 74" post, Valu Gard® green epoxy finish, NSF
Item No. 35a %
Caster
(2 REQ'D)
Eagle Group Model CSS5 300
Stem Caster, Swivel, 5" wheel diameter, 1 1/4" wheel face, 300 lb. capacity, resilient
tread, donut bumper included, EAGLEbrite® zinc, NSF
Item No. 35b %
Caster
(2 REQ'D)
Eagle Group Model CSB5 300
Stem Caster with Brake, 5" wheel diameter, 1 1/4" wheel face, 300 lb. capacity,
resilient tread, donut bumper included, EAGLEbrite® zinc, NSF
Item No. 36 %
Soda Syrup Rack
(1 REQ'D)
Custom Model SODA SYRUP RACK
Soda syrup rack as provided by others.
Item No. 37 %
June 23, 2014
Utility Rack, Mobile
(1 REQ'D)
11 40 00.01 8
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
Eagle Group Model OUR 1820 3/W
Panco® Rack, Mobile Utility, full height, open sides, with slides for (20) 18" x 26" pans,
slides on 3" centers, welded extruded aluminum frame, front loading, 5" casters
Item No. 38 %
Work Table
(1 REQ'D)
Select Stainless Products Model 5SU 24
Work Table, 60"W x 24"D, 16/300 stainless steel top with turned down edges, 16
gauge stainless steel undershelf & 16 gauge stainless steel legs & adjustable stainless
steel feet, all welded construction, NSF
Accessories:
2 ea
Drawer, 20" x 20" x 5", stainless steel pan (Flyer)
1 st
Casters, set of 4, 5", (2 with brakes) (Flyer)
Item No. 39 %
Dishwasher, Undercounter
(1 REQ'D)
Hobart Model LXER 2
LXe Advansys Undercounter Dishwasher, Hot Water Sanitation, Energy Recovery, 30,
24, 13 Racks/Hour, Fresh Water Rinse, .62 gal/rack, Automated Delime Cycle,
Clogged Wash Arm Alert, 3 selectable cycles light, normal, heavy (Pot & Pan cycle
on heavy cycle), Advanced Service Diagnostics, 120/208 240(3W)/60/1, Detergent,
Rinse Aid & Delimer Pump, ENERGY STAR®
Accessories:
1 ea
Standard warranty 1 Year parts, labor & travel time during normal
working hours
1 ea
Power cord kit, for 120/208 240(3w)/60/1 voltage
1 ea
1/2" brass pressure regulator
Item No. 40 %
Spare No.
Item No. 41 %
Pot Rack, Wall%Mounted
(1 REQ'D)
Select Stainless Products Model 5DPR S
Pot Rack, wall mount, double bar design, 60" long, 3/16" x 2" stainless steel flat bar,
includes: (2) stainless steel pot hooks per foot (Flyer)
Item No. 42 %
Pre%Rinse Unit
(1 REQ'D)
Dormont Manufacturing Model LFP WS8B AF12
Hydro Force Lead free Pre Rinse Wall Mount with wall bracket and 12" Add on
Faucet
Item No. 42a %
Faucet Parts
(1 REQ'D)
Dormont Manufacturing Model LFFRMK W
Hydro Force Lead free Wall mount kit
Item No. 43 %
Sink, (3) Three Compartment
(1 REQ'D)
Select Stainless Products Model PL 3B1824 2D24 X
Production Line Sink, 3 Compartment with 24" left and right hand drain boards, 18" x
24" x 14"D bowl,16 gauge type 304 stainless steel, 19" High Stainless steel legs,
crossrails and bullet feet, 3.5 basket drain, Bowl straps between bowls,Faucet holes on
8 centers. (Flyer)
June 23, 2014
11 40 00.01 9
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
Accessories:
Stainless steel legs/stainless steel feet (net)
1 ea
Item No. 43a %
Drain
(3 REQ'D)
Dormont Manufacturing Model W TB B
Hydro Force Twist Handle Drain with 3 1/2" opening and 2" drain outlet
Item No. 44 %
Reel Kleen Unit
(1 REQ'D)
T&S Brass Model B 1430
Hose Reel Assembly, enclosed hose reel, 30' hose with blue spray valve, concealed
mixing faucet, shut off valve and external plumbing, vacuum breaker and flexible hose
assembly
Item No.
45 %
Reach%in Refrigerator, 2 sections
(1 REQ'D)
Delfield Model SSR2 S
Specification Line Series® Refrigerator, Reach in, two section, 51.92 cubic feet, self
contained refrigeration 404A, digital thermometer, (6) chrome plated wire shelves,
built in locks, recessed metal door handle, pressure relief valve, solid hinged full height
door, S/S interior door liners, stainless steel exterior & interior, stainless steel breaker
strips, top mounted compressor, 6" adjustable stainless steel legs, cUL, UL, NSF,
ENERGY STAR®, 1/3 hp
Accessories:
1 ea
115v/60/1, 9.5 amps, NEMA 5 15P, standard
1 ea
(3) Year parts & labor warranty, standard (USA)
1 ea
(5) Year compressor warranty standard
1 ea
Self contained refrigeration system, standard
1 ea
Left door hinged on left, right door hinged on right, standard
1 ea
Stainless steel interior door liners in lieu of ABS (all doors)
1 ea
6" polyurethane casters in lieu of standard legs
24 ea
Universal Bottom Support Tray Slide, for 18" x 26" pans or 12" x 20",
per pair
Item No.
46 %
Reach%In Freezer, 1 section
(1 REQ'D)
Delfield Model SSF1 S
Specification Line Series® Freezer, Reach in, single section, 24.96 cubic feet,
self contained refrigeration 404A, digital thermometer, (3) chrome plated wire shelves,
recessed metal door handle, built in door locks, pressure relief valve, solid hinged full
height doors, stainless steel exterior & interior, 6" adjustable stainless steel legs, cUL,
UL, NSF, ENERGY STAR®, 1/2 hp
Accessories:
1 ea
115v/60/1, 9.0 amps, NEMA 5 15P, standard
1 ea
(3) Year parts & labor warranty, standard (USA)
1 ea
(5) Year compressor warranty standard
1 ea
Self contained refrigeration system, standard
1 ea
Door hinged on right standard
1 ea
Stainless steel interior door liners in lieu of ABS (all doors)
1 ea
6" polyurethane casters in lieu of standard legs
3 ea
Additional chrome plated shelf & clips, for refrigerator/freezer
Item No. 47 %
June 23, 2014
Ice Maker, Cube%Style
11 40 00.01 10
(1 REQ'D)
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
Manitowoc Model IY 0524A
Indigo™ Series Ice Maker, cube style, air cooled, self contained condenser, up to
485 lb approximately/24 hours, DuraTech™ exterior (stainless finish with innovative
clear coat resists fingerprints & dirt), half dice size cubes (not stackable), ENERGY
STAR®
Accessories:
1 ea
3 year parts & labor Commercial warranty
1 ea
5 year parts & labor Commercial warranty on evaporator
1 ea
5 year parts & 3 year labor Commercial warranty on compressor
1 ea
( 161) 115v/60/1ph, 14.4 amps
1 ea
Arctic Pure® Primary Water Filter Assembly, includes head, shroud,
hardware, mounting assembly, and one filter cartridge, 14,000 gallon
capacity, 0 600 lbs./ice per day
1 ea
Ice Bin, with top hinged front opening door, approximately 430 lb ice
storage capacity, for top mounted ice maker, stainless steel exterior
1 ea
Bin Adapter, 22" S, Indigo, RFS or RN ice machine to 30" B bins and
S dispensers, not for IB
1 ea
3 year parts & labor Commercial warranty
1 ea
6" adjustable stainless steel legs, std.
Item No. 48 %
Refrigerated Self%Service Case
(1 REQ'D)
Structural Concepts Model CO37R
Oasis® Self Service Refrigerated Case, 36 1/4"L, 79 5/8"H, Breeze E (Type II)
w/EnergyWise self contained refrigeration system, (4) non lit adjustable metal shelves,
top light, black interior, (2) full end panels, 4"D removable wall spacer brackets, casters
Accessories:
1 ea
NOTE: 34" Minimum entry door clearance required (w/out shipping
skid & w/rear spacer bracket removed)
1 ea
NOTE: If GFCI is required, a GFCI breaker MUST be used in lieu of a
GFCI receptacle
1 ea
1 yr. parts & labor warranty, 5 yr. compressor warranty, standard
1 ea
Breeze E (Type II) w/EnergyWise refrigeration NSF Type II
compliant, standard
1 ea
120v/60/1ph, 15.3 amps, cord w/NEMA 5 20P
1 ea
NOTE: Compressor air intake from front and out rear, unit MUST
remain 4" from wall & front panel cannot be blocked (Not applicable
with remote refrigeration option)
1 ea
Clean Sweep automatic condenser coil cleaner
1 ea
Base Support: Casters, standard
1 ea
Exterior: Wilsonart or Formica NON PREMIUM laminate (Color chart
available from factory rep or access color selections via
www.wilsonart.com or www.formica.com)(nc)
1 ea
NOTE: SCC will not be responsible for additional charges incurred for
Premium or other Manufacturer's laminate selections not originally
quoted
1 ea
Lower front panel: Black, standard
1 ea
Left end panel: Full w/mirrored interior, vinyl edging, standard
1 ea
Right end panel: Full w/mirrored interior, vinyl edging, standard
1 ea
Back Panel: Solid rear swinging doors with lock
1 ea
Add Lights (LED) to standard shelves (4)
1 ea
Night curtain: Retractable, non locking
1 ea
6' Power cord, exit at base, standard
June 23, 2014
11 40 00.01 11
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Building 1100 Café
Item No. 49 %
Hot Cold Drop%In Unit
Bid Documents
(2 REQ'D)
Delfield Model N8630
Drop In Hot/Cold Food Well, 30", 2 pan size for 12" x 20" pans, 8" deep single tank
with drain, remote control panel with single temperature control & three way toggle
switch, stainless steel top & well, galvanized steel exterior housing, self contained
refrigeration, 1/4 HP, cUL, UL, NSF
Accessories:
2 ea
120v/60/1 ph, 25.0 amps, standard
2 ea
(5) Year compressor warranty (net)
Item No. 50 %
Spare No.
Item No.
sneeze guard
51a %
(1 REQ'D)
Custom Model SNEEZE GUARD VG3 SK
Versa Gard adjustable food protector with shelf kit and no end panels: 1/4" clear
tempered angled glass panel(s): 3/8" clear tempered shelf glass panel(s):(3) front and
(2) rear 1"OD supports:(2) hatco# GRAHL 24 strip warmers with lights remote toggle
control 120v:concealed mount hardware options 4.2 and 6.2: 75" OA length: satin
clear annodized brushed aluminum finish.
Item No. 51b %
Sneeze guard
(1 REQ'D)
Custom Model SNEEZE GUARD VG3 SK
Sneeze guard as manufactured by Versa Gard. Adjustable food protector with shelf kit
and no end panels: 1/4" clear tempered angled glass panel(s): 3/8" clear tempered
shelf glass panel(s): (2) front and (2) rear 1" OD supports: (1) Hatco GRAHL 18 strip
warmer with lights remote toggle control 120volt: concealed mount hardware
options 4.2 and 6.2: 24" OA length: satin clear anodized aluminum finish.
Item No. 51c %
Sneeze Guard
(2 REQ'D)
Custom Model SNEEZE GUARD VG3 SK
Versa Gard sneeze guard model #VG3 SK. Adjustable food protector with shelf kitand
no end panels: 1/4"clear tempered angled glass oanel(s): 3/8" clear tempered shelf
glass panek(s): (2) front and (2) rear 1" OD supports: VG slimline LED lights remote
power supply 120v: concealed mount hardware options 4.2 and 6.2: 51" OA length:
Satin clear anodized brushed aluminum finish.
Item No. 52 %
Heated Shelf, Drop%In
(2 REQ'D)
Hatco Model GRSB 48 I 120QS
(QUICK SHIP MODEL) Glo Ray® Drop In Heated Shelf w/Recessed Top, 49 1/2" x
21", 1/2" deep recessed surface area, hardcoat aluminum top, control thermostat,
illuminated on/off switch & mounting bracket, 120v/60/1 ph, 1000 watts, NEMA 5 15P
Accessories:
1 ea
NOTE: Sale of this product must comply with Hatco's Minimum Resale
Price Policy; consult order acknowledgement for details
1 ea
NOTE: Includes 24/7 parts & service assistance, call 800 558 0607
2 ea
NOTE: Recommended for use in metallic countertop, verify that the
material is suitable for temperatures up to 200?F
Item No. 53 %
June 23, 2014
Decorative Lamp
(4 REQ'D)
11 40 00.01 12
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
Hatco Model DLH 760 CN
Decorative Lamp, High Wattage, (1) bulb type, 8 1/2" H x 12 1/2" Dia. shade, cord
mount (overall length from 17" to any length) to canopy, no switch, No bulb included
(specify finish)
Accessories:
1 ea
NOTE: Sale of this product must comply with Hatco's Minimum Resale
Price Policy; consult order acknowledgement for details
1 ea
NOTE: Includes 24/7 parts & service assistance, call 800 558 0607
1 ea
NOTE: The decorative lamp and Luminaires are NOT returnable
4 ea
120v/60/1 ph, 375 watt, standard
4 ea
Lamp Bulb, 375 Watt clear, coated
4 ea
Lamp Toggle Switch, 16 amp (shipped separately)
4 ea
designer color as selected by architect.
4 ea
Color to match unit finish
4 ea
Overall Length Up to 72" (specify to the nearest inch) verify
w/architect.
Item No. 54 %
Serving Counter
(1 REQ'D)
Custom Model SERVING COUNTER
Custom fabricated serving counter as manufactured by Columbus Woodworks (Tim
Columbus 434 528 1052). Unit features Quartz top, FRP finished interior, front
recessed plate shelves (4) and interior storage shelves. Cabinet to be finished in
laminate as selected by owner. Interior to be white FRP and propery sealed. Cabinet to
sit on 6" adjustable s/s legs complete with removable clip on base for cleaning. Verify
laminate and quartz finish with architect. Delivery, assembly and set in place is
included. Coordination of all cut outs for equipment and sneeze guards is by KEC.
Item No. 55 %
Drop%In Sink
(1 REQ'D)
Eagle Group Model SR10 14 9.5 1
Drop In Countertop Sink, 1 compartment, self rimming, 10" wide x 14" front to back x
9 1/2" deep bowl, 18/304 stainless steel, #302004 deck mounted gooseneck faucet,
3 1/2" drain hole, basket drain, mounting hardware, NSF
Accessories:
1 ea
Faucet hole punched on 4" centers, standard
1 ea
Standard faucet
Item No. 56 %
Disposable Cup Dispenser
(6 REQ'D)
San Jamar Model C2210C
Euro E Z Fit® Cup Dispenser, in counter mount, 6 to 24 oz. paper/plastic/foam cups
with rim diameter of 2 7/8" 3 11/16" , vertical or horizontal, 23 1/4"L tube, high impact
plastic, NSF
Item No. 57 %
Coffee Brewer for Satellites
(1 REQ'D)
FETCO Corp. Model CBS 61H
6000 Series Single 3.0 gallon Coffee Brewer, automatic, gravity flow dispense tube
system, gourmet coffee brew basket locks during brew cycle, hot water service, use
with TPD 30 dispenser (sold separately) THIS UNIT SUPPLIED BY OWNER. VERIFY
ALL UTILITY CONNECTIONS.
Accessories:
June 23, 2014
11 40 00.01 13
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Building 1100 Café
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
Bid Documents
NOTE: Pricing and specifications subject to change with or without
notice Please call 1.800.FETCO.99 for confirmation
Circuit board: 3 year parts & 1 year labor warranty, standard
Electro mechanical parts: 2 year parts & 1 year labor warranty,
standard
All other parts: 1 year parts & 1 year labor warranty, standard
2 x 3.0 KW heaters, 120/208 240V, 1 ph, 3+G wires, 4.6 6.1 KW,
hardwired, 22.0 25.4 max amp draw, 12.0 15.0 gallons per hour
Item No. 58 %
Integra Beverage System
(1 REQ'D)
Custom Model CONCORDIA SYSTEM 1
Concordia beverage system 1 dispenser. UNIT SUPPLIED BY OWNER. Utility
requirements: 208v 1 phase, 30 amp circuit, NEMA L6 30P. 1/2" cw with cut off valve.
3/4" indirect waste.
Item No. 59 %
Beverage Dispenser
(1 REQ'D)
Custom Model 4 DRINK EXPRESS
Beverage dispenser as provided by owner. Utility connections required: 120v 1 phase,
20 amp circuit, NEMA 5 15P, 1/2" cw with cut off. No drain required.
Item No. 60 %
Spare No.
Item No. 61 %
Soda Ice & Beverage Dispenser
(1 REQ'D)
Servend Model SV 150 6
Ice/Beverage Dispenser, 150 lb. capacity, includes: (6) Servends Flowmatic 464
beverage valves, lighted merchandiser with "Quench Your Thirst" sign, leg kit, key
switch & drain kit, UL, NSF, cUL. UNIT IS SUPPLIED BY OWNER. Utility
requirements: 120v 1 phase, 20 amp circuit, NEMA 5 15P. 1/2"cw with cut off valve,
3/4" indirect waste.
Accessories:
1 ea
Ambient carbonation, standard
1 ea
120v/60/1 ph, 2.8 amps, standard
1 ea
2 year limited parts & 1 year limited labor warranty (USA)
1 ea
Sanitary lever operated beverage valves
Item No. 62 %
Register
(1 REQ'D)
Custom Model REGISTER
Point of sale register as provided by others.
Item No. 63 %
Seating for 40
(1 REQ'D)
Custom Model SEATING FOR 40
Seating for 40 as provided by others.
Item No. 64 %
Drop%In Hot Food Well Unit, Electric
(1 REQ'D)
Delfield Model N8717 D
Drop In Hot Food Well Unit, Electric, individual pans, wet/dry type with drain &
manifold, 1 pan size for 12" x 20" pan, individual infinite temperature controls, stainless
June 23, 2014
11 40 00.01 14
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
steel top & wells, galvanized outer liner
Accessories:
1 ea
120v/60/1 ph, 8.3 amps, no cord & plug, standard
Item No. 65 %
Soft Serve Machine
(1 REQ'D)
Taylor Co. Model C707
Crown® Series Soft Serve Freezer, counter model, self contained, single flavor, 20qt.
hopper, 3.4qt. freezing cylinder, indicator lights, electronic controls, standby, digital
temperature indicator, s/s finish, (1) 9,500 BTU/hr compressor, R404A, 1 1/2hp motor
(Go to the Taylor web site link to locate your distributor for pricing & warranty
information), NSF, cULus listed, CE
Accessories:
1 ea
Two year extended parts & labor warranty (contact distributor for price)
1 ea
Air cooled
1 ea
208 230v/60/1ph, 25.0 amps
1 ea
Legs (contact distributor for price)
Item No. 66 %
Trash Units
(1 REQ'D)
Custom Model TRASH UNITS
Custom fabricated trash units constructed to match counter construction and included
in Item #54 pricing.
Item No. 67 %
Air pot dispensers
(1 REQ'D)
Custom Model AIR POT DISPENSERS
Air pot dispensers as provided by others.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
11 40 00.01 15
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 12 24 00
WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Window shades and accessories.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NFPA 701 Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films; 2010.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including
materials, finishes, fabrication details, dimensions, profiles, mounting requirements, and
accessories.
C.
Selection Samples: Include fabric samples in full range of available colors and patterns.
D.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: List of all components with part numbers, sources of supply,
and operation and maintenance instructions; include copy of shop drawings.
F.
Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executed
warranty completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.04 WARRANTY
A.
Lifetime Limited Warranty. Fabrics warranted for 5 years. Specific product warranties available
from manufacturer or its authorized agent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manually Operated Roller Shades:
1. Hunter Douglas Contract; RB 500 Manual Roller Shades:
www.hunterdouglascontract.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements.
2.02 WINDOW SHADE APPLICATIONS
A.
Shades at exterior windows: Translucent shades.
1. Type: Roller shades.
2. Fabric: GlacierScreen HD1005.
3. Color: White/Sand.
4. Mounting: Inside (between jambs).
5. Operation: Manual.
2.03 ROLLER SHADES
A.
Roller Shades: Fabric roller shades complete with mounting brackets, roller tubes, hembars,
hardware and accessories; fully factory assembled.
1. Drop: Regular roll.
2. Size: 96 inches wide by 114 inches high.
B.
Fabric: Non flammable, color fast, impervious to heat and moisture, and able to retain its shape
under normal operation.
1. Flammability: Pass NFPA 701 large and small tests.
C.
Roller tube: Circular shaped aluminum tube extruded from alloy and temper 6063 T 6. 2"
outside diameter extruded tube to have a .063" wall thickness (2.5" outside diameter to have a
.079" wall thickness). Heavily reinforced with minimum six internal ribs providing additional
tensile strength and allows for secure placement of clutch and end plug.
June 23, 2014
12 24 00 1
WINDOW SHADES
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
D.
Fascia: L shaped removable aluminum extrusion valance that attaches to brackets and
conceals roller shade. Fascia must have a 2" return on 3" tall profile fascia boxes, and a 3"
return on 4" tall profile fascia box. Maximum exposure is only 1" for the fabric to drop down from
its enclosure.
E.
Hembars and Hembar Pockets: Wall thickness designed for weight requirements and
adaptation to uneven surfaces, to maintain bottom of shade straight and flat.
1. Style: Sealed fabric pocket covering aluminum hembar.
F.
Manual Operation: Engineered heavy duty chain drive pulley operating system consisting of
metal clutch housing and locking plug containing minimum 6 ribs and inserted at minimum of
2 1/4" into roller tube. Lift torque enhancement provided by Counter Balance System with
integrated spring support module. Utilization of adjustment free continuous qualified T304
stainless steel ball chain with 110 lbs breaking strength for precise control, smooth operation
and ensuring a uniform look. Chain tensioner to be compliant with WCMA safety standard
A100.1 2010 and must prevent the clutch system from moving the roller shade through lowering
and raising if not properly installed as specified in ANSI Standard Section 6.5.2. Components
will be maintenance free from adjustments or lubrication for trouble free operation.
2.04 FABRICATION
A.
Field measure finished openings prior to ordering or fabrication.
B.
Fabricate shades to fit openings within specified tolerances.
1. Vertical Dimensions: Fill openings from head to sill with 1/2 inch space between bottom
bar and window stool.
2. Horizontal Dimensions Inside Mounting: Fill openings from jamb to jamb.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine finished openings for deficiencies that may preclude satisfactory installation.
B.
Start of installation shall be considered acceptance of substrates.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings, using
mounting devices as indicated.
B.
Installation Tolerances:
1. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/16 inch.
C.
Adjust level, projection and shade centering from mounting bracket. Verify there is no
telescoping of shade fabric. Ensure shades for smooth operation.
3.03 CLEANING
A.
Clean soiled shades and exposed components as recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Replace shades that cannot be cleaned to "like new" condition.
3.04 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed installed products from subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION
June 23, 2014
12 24 00 2
WINDOW SHADES
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
SECTION 21 10 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
A.
1.2
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
1.3
1.5
1.6
The work includes the modification of the existing wet pipe sprinkler system for normal
hazard occupancy, to provide coverage per NFPA 13 and UFC 3 600 01.
WORK BY OTHERS
A.
1.4
For General Mechanical Building requirements, see Section 23 05 00, COMMON WORK
RESULTS FOR HVAC.
All electrical connections shall be by the Electrical Contractor.
APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
Select equipment and materials from "List of Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and
Materials" published annually by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Equipment shall bear
UL approval stamp or label.
B.
Submit a complete set of working drawings to Camp Peary for review and approval.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Before any work is commenced, the Contractor shall submit to Camp Peary Fire
Protection Engineer (FPE) a complete set of working drawings of the Fire Protection
System modifications including full descriptive data for the sprinkler heads, hangers, and
all other devices, materials and equipment.
B.
The Architect shall approve sprinkler head locations. Drawings shall show sprinklers,
lights, HVAC diffusers and ceiling tile pattern.
C.
Submit to the Architect a copy of the review comments received from the Camp Peary
FPE.
D.
Welding Certificates. Welder certificates signed by Contactor certifying that welders
comply with requirements specified under the “Quality Assurance” Article.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding
Code – Steel.”
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SPRINKLER HEADS
A.
June 23, 2014
Sprinkler head shall be 1/2 inch orifice, automatic link, closed, conventional type of
ordinary degree temperature rating, except where special conditions exist, which will
require higher temperature rated sprinklers.
21 10 00 1
FIRE SUPPRESSION
Building 1100 Café
Bid Documents
2.2
2.3
B.
Furnish a supply of extra sprinklers and a special sprinkler wrench. Supply shall include
all types and ratings installed.
C.
Provide upright sprinklers in areas without ceilings.
D.
Provide recessed pendent sprinklers in areas with ceilings. Furnish one sample head to
the Architect for approval.
E.
Sprinkler heads shall be located in center of ceiling tiles.
PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Piping and fitting shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 and UFC 3 600 01.
B.
Piping and fittings four inches and larger shall be flanged or victaulic grooved couplings.
SUPPORTS, HANGERS, INSERTS
A.
Support piping from building structure by means of hangers, inserts and other supports,
as per requirements of NFPA.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Location of branches and numbers of sprinkler heads shall be as required by codes,
regulations and as approved or indicated. Piping shall be run concealed. Sprinkler heads
located in acoustical ceiling shall be at the center point of tile as approved by the
Architect.
B.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications,
tolerances, appearance, and quality of weld and for methods used in correcting welding
work.
C.
Place sprinkler heads upward with deflectors parallel to roof in areas without ceilings.
TESTS
A.
Subject system to test required by and in presence of representative of agencies having
jurisdiction. Details of test not covered by agencies requirements shall be in accordance
with NFPA 13.
B.
Provide instruments, equipment and pay expenses incurred in making tests.
C.
Contractor must provide material and test certificates for piping.
END OF SECTION 21 10 00
June 23, 2014
21 10 00 2
FIRE SUPPRESSION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4
(1999; Addenda A 2000, Addenda B 2001; R 2004) Relief
Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 90.1 IP
(2010; INT 1 2011; Errata 2011, Errata 2011; Errata 2011,
INT 2 12 2011, Errata 2011; INT 13 2012; INT 14 2012)
Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low Rise Residential
Buildings
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)
ASSE 1001
(2008) Performance Requirements for Atmospheric Type
Vacuum Breakers (ANSI approved 2009)
ASSE 1011
(2004; Errata 2004) Performance Requirements for Hose
Connection Vacuum Breakers (ANSI approved 2004)
ASSE 1012
(2009) Performance Requirements for Backflow Preventer
with an Intermediate Atmospheric Vent (ANSI approved
2009)
ASSE 1013
(2011) Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure
Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire
Protection Principle Backflow Preventers (ANSI approved
2010)
ASSE 1018
(2001) Performance Requirements for Trap Seal Primer
Valves Potable Water Supplied (ANSI Approved 2002
ASSE 1019
(2011) Performance Requirements for Vacuum Breaker Wall
Hydrants, Freeze Resistant, Automatic Draining Type (ANSI
Approved 2004)
ASSE 1020
(2004; Errata 2004; Errata 2004) Performance Requirements
for Pressure Vacuum Breaker Assembly (ANSI Approved
2004)
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 1
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA 10084
(2005) Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and
Wastewater
AWWA B300
(2010; Addenda 2011) Hypochlorites
AWWA B301
(2010) Liquid Chlorine
AWWA C651
(2005; Errata 2005) Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains
AWWA C652
(2011) Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS A5.8/A5.8M
(2011) Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze
Welding
AWS B2.2/B2.2M
(2010) Specification for Brazing Procedure and Performance
Qualification
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME A112.1.2
(2012) Standard for Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems (For
Plumbing Fixtures and Water Connected Receptors)
ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1
(2008; Update 1 2009; Update 2 2011) Standard for Vitreous
China Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic Requirements for
Water Closets and Urinals
ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4
(2008; Update 1 2009; Update 2 2011) Stainless Steel
Plumbing Fixtures
ASME A112.36.2M
(1991; R 2008) Cleanouts
ASME A112.6.3
(2001; R 2007) Standard for Floor and Trench Drains
ASME B1.20.1
(1983; R 2006) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
ASME B16.15
(2011) Cast Bronze Alloy Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and
250
ASME B16.18
(2012) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
ASME B16.22
(2001; R 2010) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper
Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
ASME B16.39
(2009) Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions;
Classes 150, 250, and 300
ASME B16.50
(2001; R 2008) Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Braze
Joint Pressure Fittings
ASME B31.5
(2010) Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 2
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
ASME BPVC SEC IV
(2010) BPVC Section IV Rules for Construction of Heating
Boilers
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A733
(2003e1; R 2009) Standard Specification for Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe
Nipples
ASTM B117
(2011) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog)
Apparatus
ASTM B32
(2008) Standard Specification for Solder Metal
ASTM B370
(2011e1) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip
for Building Construction
ASTM B584
(2011) Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand
Castings for General Applications
ASTM B813
(2010) Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for
Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube
ASTM B828
(2002; R 2010) Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints
by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings
ASTM B88
(2009) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water
Tube
ASTM B88M
(2005; R 2011) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper
Water Tube (Metric)
ASTM C564
(2011) Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast
Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
ASTM C920
(2011) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM D1785
(2012) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC),
Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120
ASTM D2235
(2004; R 2011) Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for
Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and
Fittings
ASTM D2239
(2012) Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic
Pipe (SIDR PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter
ASTM D2241
(2009) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Pressure Rated Pipe (SDR Series)
ASTM D2464
(2006) Standard Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM D2466
(2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 3
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
ASTM D2467
(2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM D2564
(2004; R 2009e1) Standard Specification for Solvent
Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping
Systems
ASTM D2661
(2011) Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile Butadiene
Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40, Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent
Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2665
(2012) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2672
(1996a; R 2009) Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using Solvent
Cement
ASTM D2683
(2010) Standard Specification for Socket Type Polyethylene
Fittings for Outside Diameter Controlled Polyethylene Pipe
and Tubing
ASTM D2737
(2012) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing
ASTM D2822/D2822M
(2005e1; R 2011) Asphalt Roof Cement
ASTM D2846/D2846M
(2009be1) Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic
Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems
ASTM D2855
(1996; R 2010) Standard Practice for Making Solvent
Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and
Fittings
ASTM D3035
(2010) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR PR) Based on
Controlled Outside Diameter
ASTM D3122
(1995; R 2009) Solvent Cements for Styrene Rubber (SR)
Plastic Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D3138
(2004; R 2011) Solvent Cements for Transition Joints
Between Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) and
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non Pressure Piping Components
ASTM D3139
(1998; R 2011) Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using
Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM D3212
(2007) Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer
Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM D3261
(2010a) Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE)
Plastic Pipe and Tubing
ASTM D3311
(2011) Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings
Patterns
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 4
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
ASTM D4101
(2011) Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and
Extrusion Materials
ASTM F1760
(2001; R 2011) Coextruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non
Pressure Plastic Pipe Having Reprocessed Recycled Content
ASTM F2389
(2010) Standard Specification for Pressure rated
Polypropylene (PP) Piping Systems
ASTM F409
(2002; R 2008) Thermoplastic Accessible and Replaceable
Plastic Tube and Tubular Fittings
ASTM F437
(2009) Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule
80
ASTM F438
(2009) Standard Specification for Socket Type Chlorinated
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule
40
ASTM F439
(2011) Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM F441/F441M
(2009) Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80
ASTM F442/F442M
(2009) Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR PR)
ASTM F477
(2010) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals
(Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe
ASTM F493
(2010) Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
ASTM F628
(2008) Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40
Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe with a Cellular Core
ASTM F877
(2011a) Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot and
Cold Water Distribution Systems
ASTM F891
(2010) Coextruded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
with a Cellular Core
COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)
CDA A4015
(1994; R 1995) Copper Tube Handbook
INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL OFFICIALS (IAPMO)
IAPMO PS 117
June 23, 2014
(2005b) Press Type Or Plain End Rub Gasketed W/ Nail CU
& CU Alloy Fittings 4 Install On CU Tubing
22 00 00 5
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)
ICC A117.1
(2009) Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities
ICC IPC
(2009) International Plumbing Code
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP 110
(2010) Ball Valves Threaded, Socket Welding, Solder Joint,
Grooved and Flared Ends
MSS SP 58
(2009) Pipe Hangers and Supports Materials, Design and
Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation
MSS SP 67
(2011) Butterfly Valves
MSS SP 69
(2003) Pipe Hangers and Supports Selection and
Application (ANSI Approved American National Standard)
MSS SP 80
(2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves
NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)
NSF/ANSI 14
(2012) Plastics Piping System Components and Related
Materials
NSF/ANSI 61
(2011; Addenda 2012) Drinking Water System Components
Health Effects
PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION (PPFA)
PPFA Fire Man
(2010) Firestopping: Plastic Pipe in Fire Resistive
Construction
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)
SAE J1508
(2009) Hose Clamp Specifications
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
Energy Star
(1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency Labeling
System
PL 93 523
(1974; A 1999) Safe Drinking Water Act
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
10 CFR 430
Energy Conservation Program for Consumer Products
40 CFR 141.80
National Primary Drinking Water Regulations; Control of Lead
and Copper; General Requirements
PL 109 58
Energy Policy Act of 2005 (EPAct05)
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 6
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 174
(2004; Reprint Jul 2011) Household Electric Storage Tank
Water Heaters
UL 430
(2009; Reprint Mar 2011) Standard for Waste Disposers
1.2
SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
Product Data
Fixtures;
List of installed fixtures with manufacturer, model, and flow rate.
Backflow prevention assemblies
Grease interceptor
Test Reports
Tests, Flushing and Disinfection
Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and
all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria,
completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final
position of controls.
Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies.
Certification of proper operation shall be as accomplished in accordance with state
regulations by an individual certified by the state to perform such tests. If no state
requirement exists, the Contractor shall have the manufacturer's representative test the
device, to ensure the unit is properly installed and performing as intended. The Contractor
shall provide written documentation of the tests performed and signed by the individual
performing the tests.
Certificates
Materials and Equipment
Where equipment is specified to conform to requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, the design, fabrication, and installation shall conform to the code.
Operation and Maintenance Data
Plumbing System
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
1.3
STANDARD PRODUCTS
Specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in
the manufacture of such products. Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has
performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening. Standard products shall have been in
satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2 year use shall include
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 7
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product
shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs,
or brochures during the 2 year period.
A. Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a two year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of
satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or
laboratory tests, can be shown.
B. Service Support
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list of
qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their
addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the
equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and
emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
C. Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address,
model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the
distributing agent will not be acceptable.
D. Modification of References
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory,
as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret
references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar meaning,
to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.
Definitions
For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents,
advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted
as "shall." Reference to the "code official" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting
Officer." For Navy owned property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to
mean the "Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner" shall be
interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit holder" shall be interpreted to
mean the "Contractor."
2.
Administrative Interpretations
For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of Chapter 1,
"Administrator," do not apply. These administrative requirements are covered by the
applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included in this contract and by the
authority granted to the Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of
this project. References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied
appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance
and the FAR.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer.
Replace damaged or defective items.
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 8
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
1.5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Unless otherwise required herein, plumbing work shall be in accordance with ICC IPC. Energy
consuming products and systems shall be in accordance with PL 109 58 and ASHRAE 90.1 IP
1.6
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise
the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work.
1.7
INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to
the designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including
pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be thoroughly
familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical
operation and maintenance work.
Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been
accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of man days (8 hours
per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than 4 man
days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use
other time for instruction with the equipment or system.
When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the
contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or
modifications.
1.8
ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are
readily accessible. Install concealed valves, controls, and equipment requiring access, in locations
freely accessible through access doors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
Materials for various services shall be in accordance with TABLES I and II. PVC pipe shall contain a
minimum of 25 percent recycled content in accordance with ASTM F1760. Pipe schedules shall be
selected based on service requirements. Pipe fittings shall be compatible with the applicable pipe
materials. Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement shall meet NSF/ANSI 14 and shall be NSF listed
for the service intended. Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement used for potable hot and cold water
service shall bear the NSF seal "NSF PW." Polypropylene pipe and fittings shall conform to
dimensional requirements of Schedule 40, Iron Pipe size and shall comply with NSF/ANSI 14,
NSF/ANSI 61 and ASTM F2389. Polypropylene piping that will be exposed to UV light shall be
provided with a Factory applied UV resistant coating. Pipe threads (except dry seal) shall conform to
ASME B1.20.1. Grooved pipe couplings and fittings shall be from the same manufacturer. Material or
equipment containing lead shall not be used in any potable water system. In line devices such as
water meters, building valves, check valves, meter stops, valves, fittings and back flow preventers shall
comply with PL 93 523 and NSF/ANSI 61, Section 8. End point devices such as lavatory faucets,
kitchen faucets, residential ice makers, supply stops and end point control valves used to dispense
water for drinking must meet the requirements of NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9.
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 9
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
A. Pipe Joint Materials
Solder containing lead shall not be used with copper pipe. Joints materials shall conform to the
following:
1.
Brazing Material: Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP 5.
2.
Brazing Flux: Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for use with brazing
material. Flux shall be as follows: lead free; have a 100 percent flushable residue;
contain slightly acidic reagents; contain potassium borides; and contain fluorides.
3.
Solder Material: Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B32.
4.
Solder Flux: Flux shall be liquid form, non corrosive, and conform to ASTM B813,
Standard Test 1.
5.
PTFE Tape: PTFE Tape, for use with Threaded Metal or Plastic Pipe.
6.
Flexible Elastomeric Seals: ASTM D3139, ASTM D3212 or ASTM F477.
7.
Solvent Cement for Transition Joints between ABS and PVC Nonpressure Piping
Components: ASTM D3138.
8.
Plastic Solvent Cement for ABS Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2235.
9.
Plastic Solvent Cement for PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2564 and ASTM D2855.
10.
Plastic Solvent Cement for CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F493.
11.
Plastic Solvent Cement for Styrene Rubber Plastic Pipe: ASTM D3122.
12.
Press fittings for Copper Pipe and Tube: Copper press fittings shall conform to the
material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22 and performance
criteria of IAPMO PS 117. Sealing elements for copper press fittings shall be EPDM,
FKM or HNBR. Sealing elements shall be factory installed or an alternative supplied
fitting manufacturer. Sealing element shall be selected based on manufacturer's
approved application guidelines.
13.
Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B88, Type K, L or M.
14.
Heat fusion joints for polypropylene piping: ASTM F2389.
B. Miscellaneous Materials
Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following:
1.
Copper, Sheet and Strip for Building Construction: ASTM B370.
2.
Asphalt Roof Cement: ASTM D2822/D2822M.
3.
Hose Clamps: SAE J1508.
4.
Metallic Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M.
5.
Hypochlorites: AWWA B300.
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 10
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
6.
Liquid Chlorine: AWWA B301.
C. Pipe Insulation Material
Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL
SYSTEMS.
2.2
PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS
Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP 58 and MSS SP 69.
2.3
VALVES
Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment and fixtures. Valves 2 1/2 inches and smaller shall
be bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and solder type connections for tubing. Pressure ratings shall
be based upon the application. Grooved end valves may be provided if the manufacturer certifies that
the valves meet the performance requirements of applicable MSS standard. Valves shall conform to
the following standards:
Description
Butterfly Valves
Ball Valves Threaded, Socket Welding, Solder
Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends
Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves
Water Heater Drain Valves
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves for Hot
Water Supply Systems
2.4
Standard
MSS SP 67
MSS SP 110
MSS SP 80
ASME BPVC SEC IV, Part HLW 810:
Requirements for Potable Water Heaters Bottom
Drain Valve
ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
Backflow prevention devices must be approved by the State or local regulatory agencies. If there is no
State or local regulatory agency requirements, the backflow prevention devices must be listed by the
Foundation for Cross Connection Control & Hydraulic Research, or any other approved testing
laboratory having equivalent capabilities for both laboratory and field evaluation of backflow prevention
devices and assemblies.
Reduced pressure principle assemblies, double check valve assemblies, atmospheric (nonpressure)
type vacuum breakers, and pressure type vacuum breakers shall meet the above requirements.
Backflow preventers with intermediate atmospheric vent shall conform to ASSE 1012. Reduced
pressure principle backflow preventers shall conform to ASSE 1013. Hose connection vacuum
breakers shall conform to ASSE 1011. Pipe applied atmospheric type vacuum breakers shall conform
to ASSE 1001. Pressure vacuum breaker assembly shall conform to ASSE 1020. Air gaps in
plumbing systems shall conform to ASME A112.1.2.
2.5
DRAINS
A. Floor Drains
Floor drains shall consist of a galvanized body, integral seepage pan, and adjustable perforated
or slotted chromium plated bronze, nickel bronze, or nickel brass strainer, consisting of grate and
threaded collar. Floor drains shall be cast iron except where metallic waterproofing membrane is
installed. Drains shall be of double drainage pattern for embedding in the floor construction. The
seepage pan shall have weep holes or channels for drainage to the drainpipe. The strainer shall
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 11
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
be adjustable to floor thickness. A clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing
membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or waterproofing membrane shall
be provided when required. Drains shall be provided with threaded connection. Between the
drain outlet and waste pipe, a neoprene rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C564 may be
installed, provided that the drain is specifically designed for the rubber gasket compression type
joint. Floor drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.3. Provide drain with trap primer connection,
trap primer, and connection piping. Primer shall meet ASSE 1018.
B. Floor Sinks
Floor sinks shall be square, with 12 inch nominal overall width or diameter and 10 inch nominal
overall depth. Floor sink shall have an acid resistant enamel interior finish with cast iron body,
aluminum sediment bucket, and perforated grate of cast iron in industrial areas and stainless
steel in finished areas. The outlet pipe size shall be as indicated or of the same size as the
connecting pipe.
2.6
TRAPS
Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be plastic per ASTM F409 or copper alloy adjustable tube type
with slip joint inlet and swivel. Traps shall be without a cleanout. Tubes shall be copper alloy with walls
not less than 0.032 inch thick within commercial tolerances, except on the outside of bends where the
thickness may be reduced slightly in manufacture by usual commercial methods. Inlets shall have
rubber washer and copper alloy nuts for slip joints above the discharge level. Swivel joints shall be
below the discharge level and shall be of metal to metal or metal to plastic type as required for the
application. Nuts shall have flats for wrench grip. Outlets shall have internal pipe thread, except that
when required for the application, the outlets shall have sockets for solder joint connections. The depth
of the water seal shall be not less than 2 inches. The interior diameter shall be not more than 1/8 inch
over or under the nominal size, and interior surfaces shall be reasonably smooth throughout. A copper
alloy "P" trap assembly consisting of an adjustable "P" trap and threaded trap wall nipple with cast
brass wall flange shall be provided for lavatories. The assembly shall be a standard manufactured unit
and may have a rubber gasketed swivel joint.
2.7
GREASE INTERCEPTOR
Grease interceptor of the size indicated shall be of reinforced concrete, or precast concrete construction
or equivalent capacity commercially available steel grease interceptor with removable three section, 3/8
inch checker plate cover, and shall be installed outside the building. Steel grease interceptor shall be
installed in a concrete pit and shall be epoxy coated to resist corrosion as recommended by the
manufacturer. Interceptors shall be tested and rated in accordance with <RID>PDI G 101</RID>.
Concrete shall have<MET> 21 MPa</MET><ENG> 3,000 psi</ENG> minimum compressive strength
at 28 days. Provide flow control fitting.
2.8
MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS
A. Escutcheon Plates
Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors, walls, and ceilings in
exposed spaces. Provide chromium plated on copper alloy plates or polished stainless steel
finish in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces.
B. Pipe Sleeves
Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors. Sleeves are not
required where drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes through concrete floor slabs located
on grade, except where penetrating a membrane waterproof floor.
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 12
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
1.
Sleeves Not in Masonry and Concrete
Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet or PVC plastic pipe sleeves.
C. Pipe Hangers (Supports)
Provide MSS SP 58 and MSS SP 69, Type 1 with adjustable type steel support rods, except as
specified or indicated otherwise. Attach to steel joists with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining
straps. Attach to wood with drilled hole on centerline and double nut and washer. Provide Type
40 insulation protection shield for insulated piping.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Installation of plastic pipe where in compliance with NFPA may be installed in accordance with PPFA
Fire Man. The plumbing system shall be installed complete with necessary fixtures, fittings, traps,
valves, and accessories. Water and drainage piping shall be extended 5 feet outside the building,
unless otherwise indicated. A ball valve and drain shall be installed on the water service line inside the
building approximately 6 inches above the floor from point of entry. Piping shall be connected to the
exterior service lines or capped or plugged if the exterior service is not in place. Sewer and water
pipes shall be laid in separate trenches, except when otherwise shown. Exterior underground utilities
shall be at least 12 inches below the average local frost depth or as indicated on the drawings. If
trenches are closed or the pipes are otherwise covered before being connected to the service lines, the
location of the end of each plumbing utility shall be marked with a stake or other acceptable means.
Valves shall be installed with control no lower than the valve body.
A. Water Pipe, Fittings, and Connections
1.
Utilities
The piping shall be extended to fixtures, outlets, and equipment. The hot water and cold
water piping system shall be arranged and installed to permit draining. The supply line to
each item of equipment or fixture, except faucets, or other control valves which are
supplied with integral stops, shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable isolation of
the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other equipment
or fixtures. Supply piping to fixtures, faucets, hydrants, shower heads, and flushing
devices shall be anchored to prevent movement.
2.
Cutting and Repairing
The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and unnecessary cutting of construction
shall be avoided. Damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment as a result of cutting
shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in the trade involved.
3.
Protection of Fixtures, Materials, and Equipment
Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and
equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemicals, and
mechanical injury. Upon completion of the work, the fixtures, materials, and equipment
shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted, and operated. Safety guards shall be provided for
exposed rotating equipment.
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 13
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
4.
Mains, Branches, and Runouts
Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be accurately cut and worked into place
without springing or forcing. Structural portions of the building shall not be weakened.
Aboveground piping shall run parallel with the lines of the building, unless otherwise
indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom, or side of
main, using crossover fittings required by structural or installation conditions. Supply
pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other
services to permit not less than 1/2 inch between finished covering on the different
services. Bare and insulated water lines shall not bear directly against building structural
elements so as to transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible movement of the
lines. Water pipe shall not be buried in or under floors unless specifically indicated or
approved. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. Use of bushings
will not be permitted except for use in situations in which standard factory fabricated
components are furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice.
Change in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4 inches and
smaller will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and wide sweep bends are
formed. The center line radius of bends shall be not less than six diameters of the pipe.
Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations will not be
acceptable.
5.
Expansion and Contraction of Piping
Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of water pipe. Each
hot water and hot water circulation riser shall have expansion loops or other provisions
such as offsets, changes in direction, etc., where indicated and/or required. Risers shall
be securely anchored as required or where indicated to force expansion to loops. Branch
connections from risers shall be made with ample swing or offset to avoid undue strain on
fittings or short pipe lengths. Horizontal runs of pipe over 50 feet in length shall be
anchored to the wall or the supporting construction about midway on the run to force
expansion, evenly divided, toward the ends. Sufficient flexibility shall be provided on
branch runouts from mains and risers to provide for expansion and contraction of piping.
Flexibility shall be provided by installing one or more turns in the line so that piping will
spring enough to allow for expansion without straining.
B. Joints
Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will
not be permitted. Joints shall be made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the
specific purpose intended.
1.
Threaded
Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming to ASME
B1.20.1. Only male pipe threads shall be coated with graphite or with an approved
graphite compound, or with an inert filler and oil, or shall have a polytetrafluoroethylene
tape applied.
2.
Unions and Flanges
Unions, flanges and mechanical couplings shall not be concealed in walls, ceilings, or
partitions. Unions shall be used on pipe sizes 2 1/2 inches and smaller; flanges shall be
used on pipe sizes 3 inches and larger.
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 14
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
3.
4.
Copper Tube and Pipe
a.
Brazed. Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2.2/B2.2M,
ASME B16.50, and CDA A4015 with flux and are acceptable for all pipe sizes.
Copper to copper joints shall include the use of copper phosphorus or copper
phosphorus silver brazing metal without flux. Brazing of dissimilar metals
(copper to bronze or brass) shall include the use of flux with either a copper
phosphorus, copper phosphorus silver or a silver brazing filler metal.
b.
Soldered. Soldered joints shall be made with flux and are only acceptable for
piping 2 inches and smaller. Soldered joints shall conform to ASME B31.5 and
CDA A4015. Soldered joints shall not be used in compressed air piping between
the air compressor and the receiver.
c.
Copper Tube Extracted Joint. Mechanically extracted joints shall be made in
accordance with ICC IPC.
Plastic Pipe
Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) pipe shall have joints made with solvent cement.
PVC and CPVC pipe shall have joints made with solvent cement elastomeric, threading,
(threading of Schedule 80 Pipe is allowed only where required for disconnection and
inspection; threading of Schedule 40 Pipe is not allowed), or mated flanged.
5.
Polypropylene Pipe
Joints for polypropylene pipe and fittings shall be made by heat fusion welding socket
type or butt fusion type fittings and shall comply with ASTM F2389.
C. Dissimilar Pipe Materials
Connections between ferrous and non ferrous copper water pipe shall be made with dielectric
unions or flange waterways. Dielectric waterways shall have temperature and pressure rating
equal to or greater than that specified for the connecting piping. Waterways shall have metal
connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping. Dielectric waterways shall be
internally lined with an insulator specifically designed to prevent current flow between dissimilar
metals. Dielectric flanges shall meet the performance requirements described herein for
dielectric waterways. Connecting joints between plastic and metallic pipe shall be made with
transition fitting for the specific purpose.
D. Pipe Sleeves and Flashing
Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent location.
1.
Sleeve Requirements
Unless indicated otherwise, provide pipe sleeves meeting the following requirements:
Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient
length to pass through entire thickness of walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors.
A modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed in lieu of a waterproofing
clamping flange and caulking and sealing of annular space between pipe and sleeve.
The seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the
annular space between the pipe and sleeve using galvanized steel bolts, nuts, and
pressure plates. The links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 15
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut.
After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolt shall
cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the
pipe and the sleeve. Each seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by the
manufacturer to fit the pipe and sleeve involved.
Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members, except where indicated or
approved. Rectangular and square openings shall be as detailed. Each sleeve shall
extend through its respective floor, or roof, and shall be cut flush with each surface,
except for special circumstances. Pipe sleeves passing through floors in wet areas such
as mechanical equipment rooms, lavatories, kitchens, and other plumbing fixture areas
shall extend a minimum of 4 inches above the finished floor.
Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be of a size to provide a minimum of 1/4 inch
clearance between bare pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve or between insulation and
inside of sleeve. Sleeves in bearing walls and concrete slab on grade floors shall be
steel pipe or cast iron pipe. Sleeves in nonbearing walls or ceilings may be steel pipe,
cast iron pipe, galvanized sheet metal with lock type longitudinal seam, or plastic.
Except as otherwise specified, the annular space between pipe and sleeve, or between
jacket over insulation and sleeve, shall be sealed as indicated with sealants conforming
to ASTM C920 and with a primer, backstop material and surface preparation as specified
in Section 079200 JOINT SEALANTS. The annular space between pipe and sleeve,
between bare insulation and sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve shall
not be sealed for interior walls which are not designated as fire rated.
Sleeves through below grade walls in contact with earth shall be recessed 1/2 inch from
wall surfaces on both sides. Annular space between pipe and sleeve shall be filled with
backing material and sealants in the joint between the pipe and wall as specified above.
Sealant selected for the earth side of the wall shall be compatible with
dampproofing/waterproofing materials that are to be applied over the joint sealant. Pipe
sleeves in fire rated walls shall conform to the requirements in Section 078413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING.
2.
Flashing Requirements
Pipes passing through roof shall be installed through a 16 ounce copper flashing, each
within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be suitably formed, and the skirt or flange
shall extend not less than 8 inches from the pipe and shall be set over the roof or floor
membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend up the pipe
a minimum of 10 inches. For cleanouts, the flashing shall be turned down into the hub
and caulked after placing the ferrule. Pipes passing through pitched roofs shall be
flashed, using lead or copper flashing, with an adjustable integral flange of adequate size
to extend not less than 8 inches from the pipe in all directions and lapped into the roofing
to provide a watertight seal. The annular space between the flashing and the bare pipe
or between the flashing and the metal jacket covered insulation shall be sealed as
indicated. Flashing for dry vents shall be turned down into the pipe to form a waterproof
joint. Pipes, up to and including 10 inches in diameter, passing through roof or floor
waterproofing membrane may be installed through a cast iron sleeve with caulking
recess, anchor lugs, flashing clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Flashing
shield shall be fitted into the sleeve clamping device. Pipes passing through wall
waterproofing membrane shall be sleeved as described above. A waterproofing
clamping flange shall be installed.
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 16
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
3.
Waterproofing
Waterproofing at floor mounted water closets shall be accomplished by forming a flashing
guard from soft tempered sheet copper. The center of the sheet shall be perforated and
turned down approximately 1 1/2 inches to fit between the outside diameter of the
drainpipe and the inside diameter of the cast iron or steel pipe sleeve. The turned down
portion of the flashing guard shall be embedded in sealant to a depth of approximately 1
1/2 inches; then the sealant shall be finished off flush to floor level between the flashing
guard and drainpipe. The flashing guard of sheet copper shall extend not less than 8
inches from the drainpipe and shall be lapped between the floor membrane in a solid
coating of bituminous cement.
4.
Optional Counterflashing
Instead of turning the flashing down into a dry vent pipe, or caulking and sealing the
annular space between the pipe and flashing or metal jacket covered insulation and
flashing, counterflashing may be accomplished by utilizing the following:
5.
a.
A standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up to 6 inches in diameter.
b.
A tack welded or banded metal rain shield around the pipe.
Pipe Penetrations
Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations. All pipe penetrations shall be sealed to
prevent infiltration of air, insects, and vermin.
E. Fire Seal
Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire partitions, fire rated pipe chase walls or floors above
grade, a fire seal shall be provided as specified in Section 078413 PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING.
F. Supports
1.
General
Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to permit
adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load. Pipe guides and
anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate alignment, to direct the expansion
movement, and to prevent buckling, swaying, and undue strain. Piping subjected to
vertical movement when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be
supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers. In
the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp shall be
used where each pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of the base support
members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing required for an individual pipe
in the multiple pipe run. Threaded sections of rods shall not be formed or bent.
2.
Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports shall conform to MSS SP 58 and MSS
SP 69, except as modified herein.
June 23, 2014
a.
Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.
b.
Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe.
22 00 00 17
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
c.
Type 40 shields shall:
(1) Be used on insulated pipe less than 4 inches.
(2) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes. High density inserts shall have a
density of 8 pcf or greater.
d.
Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP 69 and a
support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at each change
in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall be spaced not over 5 feet apart at
valves. Operating temperatures in determining hanger spacing for PVC or CPVC
pipe shall be 120 degrees F for PVC and 180 degrees F for CPVC. Horizontal
pipe runs shall include allowances for expansion and contraction.
e.
Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab on grade, at
intervals of not more than 15 feet nor more than 8 feet from end of risers, and at
vent terminations. Vertical pipe risers shall include allowances for expansion and
contraction.
f.
Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the outside
diameter of the insulation. The insulation shall be continuous through the hanger
on all pipe sizes and applications.
g.
Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress, distort, cut or abrade
the piping, and shall allow free movement of pipe except where otherwise
required in the control of expansion/contraction.
G. Pipe Cleanouts
Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than 4 inches
will not be required. leanouts shall be T pattern, 90 degree branch drainage fittings with cast
brass screw plugs, except plastic plugs shall be installed in plastic pipe. Plugs shall be the same
size as the pipe up to and including 4 inches. Cleanout tee branches with screw plug shall be
installed at the foot of soil and waste stacks, at the foot of interior downspouts, on each
connection to building storm drain where interior downspouts are indicated, and on each building
drain outside the building. Cleanouts on pipe concealed in partitions shall be provided with
chromium plated bronze, nickel bronze, nickel brass or stainless steel flush type access cover
plates. Round access covers shall be provided and secured to plugs with securing screw.
Square access covers may be provided with matching frames, anchoring lugs and cover screws.
Cleanouts in finished walls shall have access covers and frames installed flush with the finished
wall. Cleanouts installed in finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with a chrome
plated cast brass, nickel brass, or nickel bronze cover secured to the plug or cover frame and set
flush with the finished floor. Heads of fastening screws shall not project above the cover surface.
Where cleanouts are provided with adjustable heads, the heads shall be plastic.
3.2
FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS
A. Backflow Prevention Devices
Plumbing fixtures, equipment, and pipe connections shall not cross connect or interconnect
between a potable water supply and any source of non potable water. Backflow preventers shall
be installed where indicated and in accordance with ICC IPC at all other locations necessary to
preclude a cross connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any non potable
substance. In addition backflow preventers shall be installed at all locations where the potable
water outlet is below the flood level of the equipment, or where the potable water outlet will be
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 18
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
located below the level of the non potable substance. Backflow preventers shall be located so
that no part of the device will be submerged. Backflow preventers shall be of sufficient size to
allow unrestricted flow of water to the equipment, and preclude the backflow of any non potable
substance into the potable water system. Bypass piping shall not be provided around backflow
preventers. Access shall be provided for maintenance and testing. Each device shall be a
standard commercial unit.
B. Access Panels
Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls, or any item requiring
inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of sufficient size and located so that the
concealed items may be serviced, maintained, or replaced.
C. Traps
Each trap shall be placed as near the fixture as possible, and no fixture shall be double trapped.
Traps installed on plastic pipe may be plastic conforming to ASTM D3311. T
3.3
ESCUTCHEONS
Escutcheons shall be provided at finished surfaces where bare or insulated piping, exposed to view,
passes through floors, walls, or ceilings, except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms. Escutcheons
shall be fastened securely to pipe or pipe covering and shall be satin finish, corrosion resisting steel,
polished chromium plated zinc alloy, or polished chromium plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be
either one piece or split pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or setscrew.
3.4
PAINTING
Painting of pipes, hangers, supports, and other iron work, either in concealed spaces or exposed
spaces, is specified in Section 099000 PAINTING AND COATING.
A. Painting of New Equipment
New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as specified herein,
and provided under each individual section.
B. Factory Painting Systems
Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification that the
factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt spray fog test, except that
equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 hours in a salt spray fog test. Salt spray fog test
shall be in accordance with ASTM B117, and for that test the acceptance criteria shall be as
follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint shall show no signs of blistering,
wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust
creepage beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.
The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be less than
the film thickness used on the test specimen. If manufacturer's standard factory painting system
is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory
painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.
C. Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces
Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be painted.
Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 19
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces
subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to bare metal.
Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding coat is
thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat.
Color of finish coat shall be aluminum or light gray.
3.5
1.
Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the metal surfaces
subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall receive one coat of pretreatment
primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a
minimum dry film thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry
film thickness of one mil per coat.
2.
Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures
between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 400 degrees F heat resisting
enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 2 mils.
3.
Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures
greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 600 degrees F heat resisting paint
applied to a total minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION
A. Plumbing System
The following tests shall be performed on the plumbing system in accordance with ICC IPC,
except that the drainage and vent system final test shall include the smoke test. The Contractor
has the option to perform a peppermint test in lieu of the smoke test. If a peppermint test is
chosen, the Contractor must submit a testing procedure to the Contracting Officer for approval.
1.
Drainage and Vent Systems Test. The final test shall include a smoke test.
2.
Building Sewers Tests.
3.
Water Supply Systems Tests.
4.
Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies
Backflow prevention assembly shall be tested using gauges specifically designed for the
testing of backflow prevention assemblies.
Backflow prevention assembly test gauges shall be tested annually for accuracy in
accordance with the requirements of State or local regulatory agencies. If there is no
State or local regulatory agency requirements, gauges shall be tested annually for
accuracy in accordance with the requirements of University of Southern California's
Foundation of Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research or the American Water
Works Association Manual of Cross Connection (Manual M 14), or any other approved
testing laboratory having equivalent capabilities for both laboratory and field evaluation of
backflow prevention assembly test gauges. Report form for each assembly shall include,
as a minimum, the following:
Data on Device
Type of Assembly
Manufacturer
Model Number
Serial Number
June 23, 2014
Data on Testing Firm
Name
Address
Certified Tester
Certified Tester No.
22 00 00 20
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
Size
Location
Test Pressure Readings
Date of Test
Serial Number and Test Data of Gauges
If the unit fails to meet specified requirements, the unit shall be repaired and retested.
B. Defective Work
If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired
as necessary and inspection and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with
new materials. Caulking of screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable.
C. System Flushing
1.
During Flushing
Before operational tests or disinfection, potable water piping system shall be flushed with
potable water. Sufficient water shall be used to produce a water velocity that is capable
of entraining and removing debris in all portions of the piping system. This requires
simultaneous operation of all fixtures on a common branch or main in order to produce a
flushing velocity of approximately 4 fps through all portions of the piping system. In the
event that this is impossible due to size of system, the Contracting Officer (or the
designated representative) shall specify the number of fixtures to be operated during
flushing. Contractor shall provide adequate personnel to monitor the flushing operation
and to ensure that drain lines are unobstructed in order to prevent flooding of the facility.
Contractor shall be responsible for any flood damage resulting from flushing of the
system. Flushing shall be continued until entrained dirt and other foreign materials have
been removed and until discharge water shows no discoloration. All faucets and drinking
water fountains, to include any device considered as an end point device by NSF/ANSI
61, Section 9, shall be flushed a minimum of 0.25 gallons per 24 hour period, ten times
over a 14 day period.
2.
After Flushing
System shall be drained at low points. After flushing and cleaning, systems shall be
prepared for testing by immediately filling water piping with clean, fresh potable water.
Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to the finish, furnishings, or parts of the
building due to the Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system shall be
repaired by the Contractor. When the system flushing is complete, the hot water system
shall be adjusted for uniform circulation. Flushing devices and automatic control systems
shall be adjusted for proper operation according to manufacturer's instructions. Comply
with ASHRAE 90.1 IP for minimum efficiency requirements. Unless more stringent local
requirements exist, lead levels shall not exceed limits established by 40 CFR 141.80
(c)(1). The water supply to the building shall be tested separately to ensure that any lead
contamination found during potable water system testing is due to work being performed
inside the building.
D. Operational Test
Upon completion of flushing and prior to disinfection procedures, the Contractor shall subject the
plumbing system to operating tests to demonstrate satisfactory installation, connections,
adjustments, and functional and operational efficiency. Such operating tests shall cover a period
of not less than 8 hours for each system and shall include the following information in a report
with conclusion as to the adequacy of the system:
1.
June 23, 2014
Time, date, and duration of test.
22 00 00 21
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.
Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures.
3.
Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.
4.
Operation of each valve, hydrant, and faucet.
5.
Temperature of each domestic hot water supply.
6.
Operation of each floor drain by flooding with water.
7.
Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer.
E. Disinfection
After all system components are provided and operational tests are complete, the entire domestic
hot and cold water distribution system shall be disinfected. Before introducing disinfecting
chlorination material, entire system shall be flushed with potable water until any entrained dirt and
other foreign materials have been removed.
Water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651 and AWWA C652 as
modified and supplemented by this specification. The chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites
or liquid chlorine. The chlorinating material shall be fed into the water piping system at a constant
rate at a concentration of at least 50 parts per million (ppm). Feed a properly adjusted
hypochlorite solution injected into the system with a hypochlorinator, or inject liquid chlorine into
the system through a solution feed chlorinator and booster pump until the entire system is
completely filled.
Test the chlorine residual level in the water at 6 hour intervals for a continuous period of 24 hours.
If at the end of a 6 hour interval, the chlorine residual has dropped to less than 25 ppm, flush the
piping including tanks with potable water, and repeat the above chlorination procedures. During
the chlorination period, each valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times.
After the second 24 hour period, verify that no less than 25 ppm chlorine residual remains in the
treated system. The 24 hour chlorination procedure must be repeated until no less than 25 ppm
chlorine residual remains in the treated system.
Upon the specified verification, the system including tanks shall then be flushed with potable
water until the residual chlorine level is reduced to less than one part per million. During the
flushing period, each valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times.
Take addition samples of water in disinfected containers, for bacterial examination, at locations
specified by the Contracting Officer.
Test these samples for total coliform organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal,
and other bacteria) in accordance with AWWA 10084. The testing method used shall be EPA
approved for drinking water systems and shall comply with applicable local and state
requirements.
Disinfection shall be repeated until bacterial tests indicate the absence of coliform organisms
(zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in the samples for at least 2 full days. The system
will not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 22
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
3.6
WASTE MANAGEMENT
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Return solvent and oil
soaked rags for contaminant recovery and laundering or for proper disposal. Close and seal tightly
partly used sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected, well ventilated, fire safe area at
moderate temperature. Place used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers in areas designated for
hazardous waste. Separate copper and ferrous pipe waste in accordance with the Waste Management
Plan and place in designated areas for reuse.
3.7 TABLES
TABLE I
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS
Item
Pipe and Fitting Materials
SERVIC
SERVI
SERVI
SERVI
SERVI
SERVI
#
EA
CE B
CE C
CE D
CE E
CE F
1
Acrylonitrile Butadiene
X
X
X
X
X
X
Styrene (ABS) plastic
drain, waste, and vent pipe
and fittings ASTM D2661,
ASTM F628
2
Polyvinyl Chloride plastic
X
X
X
X
X
X
drain, waste and vent pipe
and fittings, ASTM D2665,
ASTM F891, (Sch 40)
ASTM F1760
3
Polypropylene (PP) waste
X
pipe and fittings, ASTM
D4101
SERVICE:
A Underground Building Soil, Waste and Storm Drain
B Aboveground Soil, Waste, Drain In Buildings
C Underground Vent
D Aboveground Vent
E Interior Rainwater Conductors Aboveground
F Corrosive Waste And Vent Above And Belowground
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 23
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
TABLE II
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS
Item
Pipe and Fitting Materials
SERVIC
SERVI
SERVI
SERVI
#
EA
CE B
CE C
CE D
1
Seamless copper pipe,
X
X
X
ASTM B41
2
Seamless copper water
X**
X**
X**
X**
tube, ASTM B88, ASTM
B88M
3
Cast bronze threaded
X**
X**
X**
X**
fittings, ASME B16.15 for
use with Item 1
4
Wrought copper and
X
X
X
X
bronze solder joint
pressure fittings, ASME
B16.22 for use with Items 1
and 2
5
Cast copper alloy solder
X
X
X
X
joint pressure fittings,
ASME B16.18 for use with
Item 2
6
Bronze and sand castings
X
X
X
grooved joint pressure
fittings for non ferrous pipe
ASTM B584
7
Polyethylene (PE) plastic
X
X
pipe, Schedules 40 and
80, based on outside
diameter
8
Polyethylene (PE) plastic
X
X
pipe (SDR PR), based on
controlled outside
diameter, ASTM D3035
9
Polyethylene (PE) plastic
X
X
pipe (SIDR PR), based on
controlled inside diameter,
ASTM D2239
10
Butt fusion polyethylene
X
X
(PE) plastic pipe fittings,
ASTM D3261 for use with
Items 8 and 9
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 24
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
TABLE II
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS
Item
Pipe and Fitting Materials
SERVIC
SERVI
SERVI
SERVI
#
EA
CE B
CE C
CE D
11
Socket type polyethylene
X
X
fittings for outside
diameter controlled
polyethylene pipe, ASTM
D2683 for use with Item 9
12
Polyethylene (PE) plastic
X
X
tubing, ASTM D2737
13
Chlorinated polyvinyl
X
X
X
chloride (CPVC) plastic hot
and cold water distribution
system, ASTM
D2846/D2846M
14
Chlorinated polyvinyl
X
X
X
X
chloride (CPVC) plastic
pipe, Schedule 40 and 80,
ASTM F441/F441M
15
Chlorinated polyvinyl
X
X
X
chloride (CPVC) plastic
pipe (SDR PR) ASTM
F442/F442M
16
Threaded chlorinated
X
X
X
polyvinyl chloride (chloride
CPVC) plastic pipe fittings,
Schedule 80, ASTM F437,
for use with Item 15
17
Socket type chlorinated
X
X
X
polyvinyl chloride (CPVC)
plastic pipe fittings,
Schedule 40, ASTM F438
for use with Items 14, 15,
and 16
18
Socket type chlorinated
X
X
X
polyvinyl chloride (CPVC)
plastic pipe fittings
Schedule 80, ASTM F439
for use with Items 14, 15,
and 16
19
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
X
X
plastic pipe, Schedules 40,
80, and 120, ASTM D1785
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 25
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
TABLE II
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS
Item
Pipe and Fitting Materials
SERVIC
SERVI
SERVI
SERVI
#
EA
CE B
CE C
CE D
20
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
X
X
pressure rated pipe (SDR
Series), ASTM D2241
21
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
X
X
plastic pipe fittings,
Schedule 40, ASTM D2466
22
Socket type polyvinyl
X
X
chloride (PVC) plastic pipe
fittings, schedule 80,
ASTM D2467 for use with
Item 21
23
Threaded polyvinyl
X
X
chloride (PVC) plastic pipe
fittings, schedule 80,
ASTM D2464
24
Joints for IPS PVC pipe
X
X
using solvent cement,
ASTM D2672
25
Polypropylene (PP) plastic
X
X
X
pipe and fittings; ASTM
F2389
26
Fittings: brass or bronze;
X
X
ASME B16.15, and ASME
B16.18 ASTM B828
27
Malleable iron threaded
X
X
pipe unions ASME B16.39
28
Nipples, pipe threaded
X
X
X
ASTM A733
29
Crosslinked Polyethylene
X
X
X
(PEX) Plastic Pipe ASTM
F877
Press Fittings:
A Cold Water Service Aboveground
B Hot and Cold Water Distribution
180 degrees F Maximum Aboveground
C Compressed Air Lubricated
D Cold Water Service Belowground
Indicated types are minimum wall thicknesses.
** Type L Hard
*** Type K Hard temper with brazed joints only or type K soft
temper without joints in or under floors
**** In or under slab floors only brazed joints
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 26
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
TABLE III
STANDARD RATING CONDITIONS AND MINIMUM PERFORMANCE RATINGS FOR WATER
HEATING EQUIPMENT
FUEL
STORAGE
TEST PROCEDURE
REQUIRED
CAPACITY
PERFORMANCE
GALLONS
A. STORAGE WATER HEATERS
Elect.
60 max.
10 CFR 430
EF = 0.93
TERMS:
EF = Energy factor, minimum overall efficiency.
END OF SECTION 22 00 00
June 23, 2014
22 00 00 27
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished
occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical
contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
This Section includes the following:
1.
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2.
Dielectric fittings.
3.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
4.
Sleeves.
5.
Escutcheons.
6.
Grout.
7.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
8.
Concrete bases.
9.
Supports and anchorages.
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
June 23, 2014
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1,
"Structural Welding Code Steel."
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1.
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2.
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and that certification is current.
Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment:
Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in
writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are
appropriately modified.
If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified,
equipment shall comply with requirements.
23 05 00 1
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A.
B.
2.2
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed
below.
Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 inch
maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
Plastic, Pipe Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead free alloys. Include water flushable flux according
to ASTM B 813.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.
Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1.
CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
2.
PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.4
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and
joining methods.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded,
solder joint, plain, or weld neck end connections that match piping system materials.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
Dielectric Unions: Factory fabricated, union assembly, for 250 psig minimum working
pressure at 180 deg F.
Dielectric Flanges: Factory fabricated, companion flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
Dielectric Couplings:
Galvanized steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive,
thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300 psig minimum working pressure at 225
deg F.
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 psig minimum working pressure at 225
deg F.
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
June 23, 2014
Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve.
Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion resistant coating or stainless
steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for
each sealing element.
23 05 00 2
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.5
SLEEVES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.6
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.7
Galvanized Steel Sheet: 0.0239 inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1.
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to
closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely
covers opening.
One Piece, Deep Pattern Type: Deep drawn, box shaped brass with polished chrome
plated finish.
One Piece, Cast Brass Type: With set screw.
1.
Finish: Polished chrome plated and rough brass.
Split Casting, Cast Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1.
Finish: Polished chrome plated and rough brass.
GROUT
A.
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic cement
grout.
1.
Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2.
Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28 day compressive strength.
3.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING SYSTEMS COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
June 23, 2014
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying
piping systems.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment
rooms and service areas.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas
at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
23 05 00 3
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
3.2
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections
specifying piping systems.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and
Tube" Chapter, using copper phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
Plastic Piping Solvent Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and
fittings according to the following:
1.
Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
2.
CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3.
PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other than schedule number
PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
4.
PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.4
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum board
partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
Aboveground, Exterior Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1.
Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2.
Install cast iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3.
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing
elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve.
Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe
and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to
expand and make watertight seal.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing in.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing in
requirements.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights
are not indicated.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems
and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference
to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
CONCRETE BASES
A.
June 23, 2014
Concrete Bases:
Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment
manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches
larger in both directions than supported unit.
23 05 00 4
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.5
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
B.
3.6
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
B.
C.
3.7
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18 inch centers around the full perimeter of the
base.
Install epoxy coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through
concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
Use 3000 psi, 28 day compressive strength concrete and reinforcement as
specified in Division 03.
Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and
anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to
view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting wood members.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
GROUTING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
Place grout around anchors.
Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 23 05 00
June 23, 2014
23 05 00 5
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
Terminology: As defined in MSS SP 90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers
and Supports."
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
C.
1.4
This Section includes the following:
1.
Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2.
Fastener systems.
3.
Equipment supports.
See Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.
Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems, system contents, and test water.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain
approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Steel pipe hangers and supports.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
to product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers specified.
STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
B.
June 23, 2014
Description: MSS SP 58, Types 1 through 58, factory fabricated components. Refer to
Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and
support types.
Manufacturers:
1.
AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.
2.
B Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
3.
Empire Industries, Inc.
4.
ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
5.
Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
6.
Grinnell Corp.
7.
National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
8.
PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
9.
PHS Industries, Inc.
23 05 29 1
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
C.
D.
E.
2.3
10.
Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for
support of bearing surface of piping.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Description: Welded, shop or field fabricated equipment support made from structural
steel shapes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.2
Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping
systems and equipment.
Comply with MSS SP 69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment
that will not have field applied finish.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as
specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated
or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
2.
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Vertical Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
2.
Carbon or Alloy Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 8, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
Hanger Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy
loads.
2.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Side Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
June 23, 2014
Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP 69 and MSS SP 89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers,
and other accessories.
Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded structural steel shapes.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
23 05 29 2
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
E.
F.
G.
3.3
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
3.4
Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to
support equipment above floor.
METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
B.
C.
3.5
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9
(for building services piping) are not exceeded.
Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project
through insulation.
b.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger
shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power
piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2.
Install MSS SP 58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier
is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
3.
Install MSS SP 58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
4.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b.
NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c.
NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
5.
Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with
the following:
1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3.
Remove welding flux immediately.
4.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to
achieve indicated slope of pipe.
END OF SECTION 23 05 29
June 23, 2014
23 05 29 3
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publi
cations are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. At the discretion of the Gov
ernment, the manufacturer of any material supplied will be required to furnish test reports pertain
ing to any of the tests necessary to assure compliance with the standard or standards referenced
in this specification.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND
AIR CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 90.1 IP
(2010; Errata 1 3 2011; INT 1 12 2011; Addenda A, B, C, G,
H, J, K, O, P, S, Y, Z, BZ, CG, CI and DS 2012; Errata 4 8
2012; INT 13 16 2012; Errata 9 12 2013; INT 17 2013) Ener
gy Standard for Buildings Except Low Rise Residential Build
ings
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A167
(1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for Stainless and
Heat Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
ASTM A580/A580M
(2013) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire
ASTM B209
(2010) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum
Alloy Sheet and Plate
ASTM C1126
(2012a) Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid
Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation
ASTM C1136
(2012) Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance
Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation
ASTM C1290
(2011) Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass
Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts
ASTM C1710
(2011) Standard Guide for Installation of Flexible Closed Cell
Preformed Insulation in Tube and Sheet Form
ASTM C195
(2007; R 2013) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber
Thermal Insulating Cement
ASTM C450
(2008) Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulat
ing Fitting Covers for NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging
ASTM C533
(2013) Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and
Pipe Thermal Insulation
ASTM C534/C534M
(2011) Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elasto
meric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 1
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
ASTM C547
(2012) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insula
tion
ASTM C552
(2012b) Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal In
sulation
ASTM C585
(2010) Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of
Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing
ASTM C610
(2011) Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite
Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
ASTM C612
(2010) Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation
ASTM C647
(2008) Properties and Tests of Mastics and Coating Finishes
for Thermal Insulation
ASTM C795
(2008; R 2013) Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation
for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel
ASTM C916
(1985; R 2007) Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct
Thermal Insulation
ASTM C920
(2011) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM C921
(2010) Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of
Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation
ASTM D2863
(2012) Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to
Support Candle Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index)
ASTM D882
(2012) Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting
ASTM E2231
(2009) Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Pipe and Duct
Insulation Materials to Assess Surface Burning Characteris
tics
ASTM E2336
(2004; R 2009) Standard Test Methods for Fire Resistive
Grease Duct Enclosure Systems
ASTM E84
(2012c) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characte
ristics of Building Materials
ASTM E96/E96M
(2012) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission
of Materials
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM APP GUIDE
June 23, 2014
(updated on line) Approval Guide http://www.approvalguide.com/
23 07 00 2
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE
VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP 69
(2003; Notice 2012) Pipe Hangers and Supports Selection
and Application (ANSI Approved American National Stan
dard)
MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA)
MICA Insulation Stds
(1999) National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards
SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)
SCS
Scientific Certification Systems (SCS)Indoor Advantage
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
MIL A 24179
(1969; Rev A; Am 2 1980; Notice 1 1987) Adhesive, Flexible
Unicellular Plastic Thermal Insulation
MIL A 3316
(1987; Rev C; Am 2 1990) Adhesives, Fire Resistant, Ther
mal Insulation
MIL PRF 19565
(1988; Rev C) Coating Compounds, Thermal Insulation, Fire
and Water Resistant, Vapor Barrier
UL ENVIRONMENT (ULE)
ULE Greenguard
UL Greenguard Certification Program
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 723
(2008; Reprint Sep 2010) Test for Surface Burning Characte
ristics of Building Materials
UL 94
(2013) Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Mate
rials for Parts in Devices and Appliances
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.2.1
General
Provide field applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems as specified herein; factory
applied insulation is specified under the piping, duct or equipment to be insulated. Field applied insula
tion materials required for use on Government furnished items as listed in the SPECIAL CONTRACT
REQUIREMENTS shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.
1.2.2 Recycled Materials
Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent practicable, provided that the ma
terials meet all other requirements of this section. The minimum recycled material content of the fol
lowing insulation are:
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 3
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
1.3
Rock Wool
75 percent slag of weight
Fiberglass
20 25 percent glass cullet by weight
Rigid Foam
9 percent recovered material
SUBMITTALS
Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Manufacturer's Instructions at the same time for each
system.
Pipe Insulation Systems
Duct Insulation Systems
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1
Installer Qualification
Qualified installers shall have successfully completed three or more similar type jobs within the
last 5 years.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unopened containers. Materials delivered and
placed in storage shall be provided with protection from weather, humidity, dirt, dust and other
contaminants. The Contracting Officer may reject insulation material and supplies that become
dirty, dusty, wet, or contaminated by some other means. Packages or standard containers of in
sulation, jacket material, cements, adhesives, and coatings delivered for use, and samples re
quired for approval shall have manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving the name of the
manufacturer and brand, and a description of the material, date codes, and approximate shelf life
(if applicable). Insulation packages and containers shall be asbestos free.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
STANDARD PRODUCTS
Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the
manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory
use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Submit a complete list of materials, including manu
facturer's descriptive technical literature, performance data, catalog cuts, and installation instruc
tions. The product number, k value, thickness and furnished accessories including adhesives,
sealants and jackets for each mechanical system requiring insulation shall be included. The
product data must be copyrighted, have an identifying or publication number, and shall have been
published prior to the issuance date of this solicitation.
2.1.1
Insulation System
Provide insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA National Insulation Standards
plates as supplemented by this specification. Provide field applied insulation for heating, ventilat
ing, and cooling (HVAC) air distribution systems and piping systems that are located within, on,
under, and adjacent to buildings; and for plumbing systems. Insulation shall be CFC and HCFC
free.
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 4
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.1.2
Surface Burning Characteristics
Unless otherwise specified, insulation shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a
maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Flame
spread, and smoke developed indexes, shall be determined by ASTM E84 or UL 723. Insulation
shall be tested in the same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in the actual
construction. Test specimens shall be prepared and mounted according to ASTM E2231.
2.2
MATERIALS
Provide insulation that meets or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 IP. Insulation exte
rior shall be cleanable, grease resistant, non flaking and non peeling. Materials shall be compat
ible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in
either wet or dry state. Materials to be used on stainless steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C795
requirements. Calcium silicate shall not be used on chilled or cold water systems. Materials shall
be asbestos free. Provide product recognized under UL 94 (if containing plastic) and listed in FM
APP GUIDE.
2.2.1
Adhesives
2.2.1.1 Acoustical Lining Insulation Adhesive
Adhesive shall be a nonflammable, fire resistant adhesive conforming to ASTM C916, Type I.
2.2.1.2 Mineral Fiber Insulation Cement
Cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C195.
2.2.1.3 Lagging Adhesive
Lagging is the material used for thermal insulation, especially around a cylindrical object. This may in
clude the insulation as well as the cloth/material covering the insulation. Lagging adhesives shall be
nonflammable and fire resistant and shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum
smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Adhesive shall be MIL A
3316, Class 1, pigmented white and be suitable for bonding fibrous glass cloth to faced and unfaced
fibrous glass insulation board; for bonding cotton brattice cloth to faced and unfaced fibrous glass insu
lation board; for sealing edges of and bonding glass tape to joints of fibrous glass board; for bonding
lagging cloth to thermal insulation; or Class 2 for attaching fibrous glass insulation to metal surfaces.
Lagging adhesives shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for
pipe and duct insulation.
2.2.1.4 Contact Adhesive
Adhesives may be any of, but not limited to, the neoprene based, rubber based, or elastomeric type
that have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84. The adhesive shall not adversely affect, initially or in service,
the insulation to which it is applied, nor shall it cause any corrosive effect on metal to which it is ap
plied. Any solvent dispersing medium or volatile component of the adhesive shall have no objectiona
ble odor and shall not contain any benzene or carbon tetrachloride. The dried adhesive shall not emit
nauseous, irritating, or toxic volatile matters or aerosols when the adhesive is heated to any tempera
ture up to 212 degrees F. The dried adhesive shall be nonflammable and fire resistant. Flexible Elas
tomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL A 24179, Type II, Class I. Provide product listed in FM APP
GUIDE.
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 5
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.2.2 Caulking
ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use A.
2.2.3 Corner Angles
Nominal 0.016 inch aluminum 1 by 1 inch with factory applied kraft backing. Aluminum shall be
ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3105, or 5005.
2.2.4 Fittings
Fabricated Fittings are the prefabricated fittings for flexible elastomeric pipe insulation systems in
accordance with ASTM C1710. Together with the flexible elastomeric tubes, they provide com
plete system integrity for retarding heat gain and controlling condensation drip from chilled water
and refrigeration systems. Flexible elastomeric, fabricated fittings provide thermal protection (0.25
k) and condensation resistance (0.05 Water Vapor Transmission factor). For satisfactory perfor
mance, properly installed protective vapor retarder/barriers and vapor stops shall be used on high
relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications to reduce movement of moisture
through or around the insulation to the colder interior surface.
2.2.5
Finishing Cement
ASTM C450: Mineral fiber hydraulic setting thermal insulating and finishing cement. All cements
that may come in contact with Austenitic stainless steel must comply with ASTM C795.
2.2.6
Fibrous Glass Cloth and Glass Tape
Fibrous glass cloth, with 20X20 maximum mesh size, and glass tape shall have maximum flame
spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84. Tape shall be 4 inch wide rolls. Class 3 tape shall be 4.5 ounces/square yard. Elas
tomeric Foam Tape: Black vapor retarder foam tape with acrylic adhesive containing an anti
microbial additive.
2.2.7
Staples
Outward clinching type monel or ASTM A167, Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.
2.2.8
Jackets
2.2.8.1 Aluminum Jackets
Aluminum jackets shall be corrugated, embossed or smooth sheet, 0.016 inch nominal thickness;
ASTM B209, Temper H14, Temper H16, Alloy 3003, 5005, or 3105. Corrugated aluminum jacket shall
not be used outdoors. Aluminum jacket securing bands shall be Type 304 stainless steel, 0.015 inch
thick, 1/2 inch wide for pipe under 12 inch diameter and 3/4 inch wide for pipe over 12 inch and larger
diameter. Aluminum jacket circumferential seam bands shall be 2 by 0.016 inch aluminum matching
jacket material. Bands for insulation below ground shall be 3/4 by 0.020 inch thick stainless steel, or fi
berglass reinforced tape. The jacket may, at the option of the Contractor, be provided with a factory
fabricated Pittsburgh or "Z" type longitudinal joint. When the "Z" joint is used, the bands at the circum
ferential joints shall be designed by the manufacturer to seal the joints and hold the jacket in place.
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 6
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.2.8.2 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Jackets
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket and fitting covers shall have high impact strength, ultraviolet (UV) resis
tant rating or treatment and moderate chemical resistance with minimum thickness 0.030 inch.
2.2.8.3 Vapor Barrier/Vapor Retarder
Apply the following criteria to determine which system is required.
2.2.9
a.
On ducts, piping and equipment operating below 95 degrees F or located outside shall be
equipped with a vapor barrier.
b.
Ducts, pipes and equipment that are located inside and that always operate above 95
degrees F shall be installed with a vapor retarder where required as stated in paragraph
VAPOR RETARDER REQUIRED.
Vapor Retarder Required
ASTM C921, Type I, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except con
cealed ductwork, where a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Mini
mum tensile strength, 35 pounds/inch width. ASTM C921, Type II, minimum puncture resistance
25 Beach units, tensile strength minimum 20 pounds/inch width. Jackets used on insulation ex
posed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without sizing. Based on the
application, insulation materials that require manufacturer or fabricator applied pipe insulation
jackets are cellular glass, when all joints are sealed with a vapor barrier mastic, and mineral fiber.
All non metallic jackets shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke
developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Flexible elastomerics require
(in addition to vapor barrier skin) vapor retarder jacketing for high relative humidity and below
ambient temperature applications.
2.2.9.1 White Vapor Retarder All Service Jacket (ASJ)
ASJ is for use on hot/cold pipes or ducts indoors or outdoors if covered by a suitable protective jacket.
The product shall meet all physical property and performance requirements of ASTM C1136, Type I,
except the burst strength shall be a minimum of 85 psi. ASTM D2863 Limited Oxygen Index (LOI) shall
be a minimum of 31.
In addition, neither the outer exposed surface nor the inner most surface contacting the insulation shall
be paper or other moisture sensitive material. The outer exposed surface shall be white and have an
emittance of not less than 0.80. The outer exposed surface shall be paintable.
2.2.9.2 Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier Mastic Coatings
a.
The vapor barrier shall be self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed)
greater than 3 plies standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed white jacket for
use on hot/cold pipes. Permeability shall be less than 0.02 when tested in accordance
with ASTM E96/E96M. Products shall meet UL 723 or ASTM E84 flame and smoke re
quirements and shall be UV resistant.
b.
The vapor retarder coating shall be fire and water resistant and appropriately selected for
either outdoor or indoor service. Color shall be white. The water vapor permeance of the
compound shall be 0.013 perms or less at 43 mils dry film thickness as determined ac
cording to procedure B of ASTM E96/E96M utilizing apparatus described in ASTM
E96/E96M. The coating shall be nonflammable, fire resistant type. Coating shall meet
MIL PRF 19565 Type II (if selected for indoor service) and be Qualified Products Data
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 7
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
base listed. All other application and service properties shall be in accordance with
ASTM C647.
2.2.9.3 Laminated Film Vapor Retarder
ASTM C1136, Type I, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, minimum puncture resis
tance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except concealed ductwork; where Type II, maximum moisture
vapor transmission 0.02 perms, a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Va
por retarder shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index
of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Flexible Elastomeric exterior foam with factory ap
plied UV Jacket. Construction of laminate designed to provide UV resistance, high puncture, tear re
sistance and an excellent WVT rate.
2.2.9.4 Polyvinylidene Chloride (PVDC) Film Vapor Retarder
The PVDC film vapor retarder shall have a maximum moisture vapor transmission of 0.02 perms, min
imum puncture resistance of 150 Beach units, a minimum tensile strength in any direction of 30 lb/inch
when tested in accordance with ASTM D882, and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maxi
mum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.2.9.5 Polyvinylidene Chloride Vapor Retarder Adhesive Tape
Requirements must meet the same as specified for Laminated Film Vapor Retarder above.
2.2.10 Vapor Retarder Not Required
ASTM C921, Type II, Class D, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces ex
cept ductwork, where Type IV, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.10, a minimum puncture
resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Jacket shall have a maximum flame spread index of
25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.2.11 Wire
Soft annealed ASTM A580/A580M Type 302, 304 or 316 stainless steel, 16 or 18 gauge.
2.2.12 Insulation Bands
Insulation bands shall be 1/2 inch wide; 26 gauge stainless steel.
2.2.13 Sealants
Sealants shall be chosen from the butyl polymer type, the styrene butadiene rubber type, or the
butyl type of sealants. Sealants shall have a maximum permeance of 0.02 perms based on Pro
cedure B for ASTM E96/E96M, and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke
developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.3
PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS
Insulation materials shall conform to Table 1. Insulation thickness shall be as listed in Table 2
and meet or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 IP. Pipe insulation materials shall be li
mited to those listed herein and shall meet the following requirements:
2.3.1
Aboveground Cold Pipeline ( 30 to 60 deg. F)
Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications, shall be as follows:
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 8
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.3.2
a.
Cellular Glass: ASTM C552, Type II, and Type III. Supply the insulation from the fabrica
tor with (paragraph WHITE VAPOR RETARDER ALL SERVICE JACKET (ASJ)) ASJ va
por retarder and installed with all longitudinal overlaps sealed and all circumferential
joints ASJ taped or supply the insulation unfaced from the fabricator and install with all
longitudinal and circumferential joints sealed with vapor barrier mastic..
b.
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: Closed cell, foam or expanded rubber materials
containing anti microbial additive, complying with ASTM C534/C534M, Grade 1, Type I or
II. Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials. Type II, Grade 1, for sheet materials. Type I
and II shall have vapor retarder/vapor barrier skin on one or both sides of the insulation,
and require an additional exterior vapor retarder covering for high relative humidity and
below ambient temperature applications.
c.
Mineral Fiber Insulation with Integral Wicking Material (MFIWM): ASTM C547. Install in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not use in applications exposed to out
door ambient conditions in climatic zones 1 through 4.
Aboveground Hot Pipeline (Above 60 deg. F)
Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications shall meet the following re
quirements. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory applied jacket/vapor
barrier.
a.
Mineral Fiber: ASTM C547, Types I, II or III, supply the insulation with manufacturer's
recommended factory applied jacket.
b.
Calcium Silicate: ASTM C533, Type I indoor only, or outdoors above 250 degrees F pipe
temperature. Supply insulation with the manufacturer's recommended factory applied
jacket/vapor barrier.
c.
Cellular Glass: ASTM C552, Type II and Type III. Supply the insulation with manufac
turer's recommended factory applied jacket.
d.
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: Closed cell, foam or expanded rubber materials
containing anti microbial additive, complying with ASTM C534/C534M, Grade 1, Type I or
II to 220 degrees F service. Type I for tubular materials. Type II for sheet materials.
e.
Phenolic Insulation: ASTM C1126 Type III to 250 degrees F service shall comply with
ASTM C795. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory applied
jacket/vapor barrier.
f.
Perlite Insulation: ASTM C610
2.4
DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS
2.4.1
Factory Applied Insulation
2.4.1.1 Blanket Insulation
Blanket flexible mineral fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C585, Type 1, Class B 3, 3/4 pcf nominal,
2.0 inches thick or Type II up to 250 degrees F. Also ASTM C1290 Type III may be used. Alternately,
minimum thickness may be calculated in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 IP.
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 9
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.4.2
Kitchen Exhaust Ductwork Insulation
Insulation thickness shall be a minimum of 2 inches, blocks or boards, either mineral fiber con
forming to ASTM C612, Class 5, 20 pcf average or calcium silicate conforming to ASTM C533,
Type II. Provide vapor barrier for outside air connection to kitchen exhaust hood. The enclosure
materials and the grease duct enclosure systems shall meet testing requirements of ASTM
E2336 for noncombustibility, fire resistance, durability, internal fire, and fire engulfment with a
through penetration fire stop.
2.4.3
Duct Insulation Jackets
2.4.3.1 All Purpose Jacket
Provide insulation with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced fire retardant jacket with or with
out integral vapor barrier as required by the service. In exposed locations, provide jacket with a white
surface suitable for field painting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION GENERAL
Insulation shall only be applied to unheated and uncooled piping and equipment. Flexible elas
tomeric cellular insulation shall not be compressed at joists, studs, columns, ducts, hangers, etc.
The insulation shall not pull apart after a one hour period; any insulation found to pull apart after
one hour, shall be replaced.
3.1.1
Installation
Except as otherwise specified, material shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions. Insulation materials shall not be applied until tests specified in other sections
of this specification are completed. Material such as rust, scale, dirt and moisture shall be re
moved from surfaces to receive insulation. Insulation shall be kept clean and dry. Insulation shall
not be removed from its shipping containers until the day it is ready to use and shall be returned
to like containers or equally protected from dirt and moisture at the end of each workday. Insula
tion that becomes dirty shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to use. If insulation becomes wet or if
cleaning does not restore the surfaces to like new condition, the insulation will be rejected, and
shall be immediately removed from the jobsite. Joints shall be staggered on multi layer insula
tion. Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall be mixed with demineralized water when used
on stainless steel surfaces. Insulation, jacketing and accessories shall be installed in accordance
with MICA Insulation Stds plates except where modified herein or on the drawings.
3.1.2
Installation of Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation
Install flexible elastomeric cellular insulation with seams and joints sealed with rubberized contact
adhesive. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be used on surfaces greater than 220
degrees F. Stagger seams when applying multiple layers of insulation. Protect insulation ex
posed to weather and not shown to have vapor barrier weatherproof jacketing with two coats of
UV resistant finish or PVC or metal jacketing as recommended by the manufacturer after the ad
hesive is dry and cured.
3.1.2.1 Adhesive Application
Apply a brush coating of adhesive to both butt ends to be joined and to both slit surfaces to be sealed.
Allow the adhesive to set until dry to touch but tacky under slight pressure before joining the surfaces.
Insulation seals at seams and joints shall not be capable of being pulled apart one hour after applica
tion. Insulation that can be pulled apart one hour after installation shall be replaced.
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 10
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
3.1.2.2 Adhesive Safety Precautions
Use natural cross ventilation, local (mechanical) pickup, and/or general area (mechanical) ventilation to
prevent an accumulation of solvent vapors, keeping in mind the ventilation pattern must remove any
heavier than air solvent vapors from lower levels of the workspaces. Gloves and spectacle type safety
glasses are recommended in accordance with safe installation practices.
3.1.3
Welding
No welding shall be done on piping, duct or equipment without written approval of the Contracting
Officer. The capacitor discharge welding process may be used for securing metal fasteners to
duct.
3.1.4
Pipes/Ducts/ That Require Insulation
Insulation is required on all pipes and ducts except for omitted items as specified.
3.2
PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
Install pipe insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA Insulation Stds plates as
supplemented by the manufacturer's published installation instructions.
3.2.1
Pipe Insulation
3.2.1.1 General
Pipe insulation shall be installed on aboveground hot and cold pipeline systems as specified below to
form a continuous thermal retarder/barrier, including straight runs, fittings and appurtenances unless
specified otherwise. Installation shall be with full length units of insulation and using a single cut piece
to complete a run. Cut pieces or scraps abutting each other shall not be used. Pipe insulation shall be
omitted on the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Pipe used solely for fire protection.
Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures. However, fixtures for use by the physically
handicapped shall have the hot water supply and drain, including the trap, insulated
where exposed.
Sanitary drain lines.
Air chambers.
Adjacent insulation.
ASME stamps.
Access plates of fan housings.
leanouts or handholes.
3.2.1.2 Pipes Passing Through Walls and Floors
a.
Pipe insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve.
b.
An aluminum jacket or vapor barrier/weatherproofing self adhesive jacket (minimum 2
mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, greater than 3 ply stan
dard grade, silver, white, black and embossed with factory applied moisture retarder shall
be provided over the insulation wherever penetrations require sealing.
c.
Where pipes penetrate interior walls, the aluminum jacket or vapor bar
rier/weatherproofing self adhesive jacket (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed)
less than 0.0000 permeability, greater than 3 plies standard grade, silver, white, black
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 11
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
and embossed shall extend 2 inches beyond either side of the wall and shall be secured
on each end with a band.
d.
Where penetrating floors, the aluminum jacket shall extend from a point below the back
up material to a point 10 inches above the floor with one band at the floor and one not
more than 1 inch from the end of the aluminum jacket.
e.
Where penetrating waterproofed floors, the aluminum jacket shall extend from below the
backup material to a point 2 inches above the flashing with a band 1 inch from the end of
the aluminum jacket.
f.
Where penetrating exterior walls, the aluminum jacket required for pipe exposed to
weather shall continue through the sleeve to a point 2 inches beyond the interior surface
of the wall.
g.
For hot water pipes supplying lavatories or other similar heated service that requires insu
lation, the insulation shall be terminated on the backside of the finished wall. The insula
tion termination shall be protected with two coats of vapor barrier coating with a minimum
total thickness of 1/16 inch applied with glass tape embedded between coats (if applica
ble). The coating shall extend out onto the insulation 2 inches and shall seal the end of
the insulation. Glass tape seams shall overlap 1 inch. The annular space between the
pipe and wall penetration shall be caulked with approved fire stop material. The pipe and
wall penetration shall be covered with a properly sized (well fitting) escutcheon plate.
The escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall penetration at least 3/8 inches.
h.
For domestic cold water pipes supplying lavatories or other similar cooling service that
requires insulation, the insulation shall be terminated on the finished side of the wall (i.e.,
insulation must cover the pipe throughout the wall penetration). The insulation shall be
protected with two coats of weather barrier mastic (breather emulsion type weatherproof
mastic impermeable to water and permeable to air) with a minimum total thickness of
1/16 inch. The mastic shall extend out onto the insulation 2 inches and shall seal the end
of the insulation. The annular space between the outer surface of the pipe insulation and
the wall penetration shall be caulked with an approved fire stop material having vapor re
tarder properties. The pipe and wall penetration shall be covered with a properly sized
(well fitting) escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall penetration by
at least 3/8 inches.
3.2.1.3 Pipes Passing Through Hangers
Insulation, whether hot or cold application, shall be continuous through hangers. All horizontal
pipes 2 inches and smaller shall be supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protec
tion shield to protect the insulation in accordance with MSS SP 69. Whenever insulation shows
signs of being compressed, or when the insulation or jacket shows visible signs of distortion at or
near the support shield, insulation inserts as specified below for piping larger than 2 inches shall
be installed, or factory insulated hangers (designed with a load bearing core) can be used.
3.2.1.4 Inserts
Covered with a jacket material of the same appearance and quality as the adjoining pipe insula
tion jacket, overlap the adjoining pipe jacket 1 1/2 inches, and seal as required for the pipe jacket.
the jacket material used to cover inserts in flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall conform to
ASTM C1136, Type 1 and is allowed to be of a different material than the adjoining insulation ma
terial.
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 12
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
3.2.1.5 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation
Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for pipe sizes 6 inches and less.
Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation. Sweat fittings shall be in
sulated with miter cut pieces the same size as on adjacent piping. Screwed fittings shall be insu
lated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from miter cut pieces and shall be overlapped and
sealed to the adjacent pipe insulation. Type II requires an additional exterior vapor retard
er/barrier covering for high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications.
3.2.1.6 Pipe Insulation Material and Thickness
TABLE 1
Insulation Material for Piping
Service
Material
Specification
Type
Class
VR/VB
Req'd
Heating Hot Water Supply (Max 250 F)
Mineral Fiber
ASTM C547
I
1
No
Calcium Silicate
ASTM C533
I
Cellular Glass
ASTM C552
II
Faced Phenolic Foam
ASTM C1126
III
Perlite
ASTM C610
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
ASTM C534/C534M
I
2
No
ASTM C552
ASTM C534/C534M
II
I
2
No
No
No
2
No
Yes
No
Cold Domestic Water Piping
Cellular Glass
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Hot Domestic Water Supply Piping (Max 200 F)
Mineral Fiber
ASTM C547
I
1
No
Cellular Glass
ASTM C552
II
2
No
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
ASTM C534/C534M
I
No
Faced Phenolic Foam
ASTM C1126
III
Yes
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 13
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
TABLE 1
Insulation Material for Piping
Service
Material
Specification
Type
Class
VR/VB
Req'd
Refrigerant Suction Piping (35 degrees F nominal)
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
ASTM C534/C534M
I
No
Cellular Glass
ASTM C552
II
1
Yes
II
I
2
No
No
Condensate Drain Located Inside Building
Cellular Glass
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
ASTM C552
ASTM C534/C534M
Note: VR/VB = Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 14
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
TABLE 2
Piping Insulation Thickness (inch)
Do not use integral wicking material in Chilled water applications exposed to outdoor ambient conditions
in climatic zones 1 through 4.
Service
Material
Tube And Pipe Size (inch)
<1
1 <1.5
1.5 <4
4 <8
> or = >8
Cold Domestic Water Piping
Cellular Glass
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
Hot Domestic Water Supply Piping (Max 200 F)
Mineral Fiber
1
1
1
1.5
1.5
Cellular Glass
1.5
1.5
1.5
2
2
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
Refrigerant Suction Piping (35 degrees F nominal)
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
Cellular Glass
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Cellular Glass
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
Condensate Drain Located Inside Building
3.2.2
Aboveground Cold Pipelines
The following cold pipelines for minus 30 to plus 60 degrees F, shall be insulated in accordance
with Table 2 except those piping listed in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omit
ted. This includes but is not limited to the following:
a.
Refrigerant suction lines.
b.
Exposed lavatory drains and domestic water lines serving plumbing fixtures for handicap
persons.
c.
Domestic cold and chilled drinking water.
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 15
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
3.2.2.1 Insulation Material and Thickness
Insulation thickness for cold pipelines shall be determined using Table 2.
3.2.2.2 Factory or Field applied Jacket
Insulation shall be covered with a factory applied vapor retarder jacket/vapor barrier or field applied
seal welded PVC jacket or greater than 3 ply laminated self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3
mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade,
sliver, white, black and embossed for use with Mineral Fiber, Cellular Glass, and Phenolic Foam Insu
lated Pipe. Insulation inside the building, to be protected with an aluminum jacket or greater than 3ply
vapor barrier/weatherproofing self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product,
less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, Embossed Silver, White & Black, shall have the insula
tion and vapor retarder jacket installed as specified herein. The aluminum jacket or greater than 3ply
vapor barrier/weatherproofing self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product,
less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, embossed silver, White & Black, shall be installed as
specified for piping exposed to weather, except sealing of the laps of the aluminum jacket is not re
quired. In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment rooms, kitchens, and
mechanical rooms, aluminum jackets or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self adhesive
(minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade,
embossed silver, white & black, shall be provided for pipe insulation to the 6 ft level.
3.2.2.3 Installing Insulation for Straight Runs Hot and Cold Pipe
a.
Insulation shall be applied to the pipe with joints tightly butted. All butted joints and ends
shall be sealed with joint sealant and sealed with a vapor retarder coating, greater than 3
ply laminate jacket less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or PVDC adhesive tape.
b.
Longitudinal laps of the jacket material shall overlap not less than 1 1/2 inches. Butt
strips 3 inches wide shall be provided for circumferential joints.
c.
Laps and butt strips shall be secured with adhesive and stapled on 4 inch centers if not
factory self sealing. If staples are used, they shall be sealed in accordance with item "e."
below. Note that staples are not required with cellular glass systems.
d.
Factory self sealing lap systems may be used when the ambient temperature is between
40 and 120 degrees F during installation. The lap system shall be installed in accor
dance with manufacturer's recommendations. Stapler shall be used only if specifically
recommended by the manufacturer. Where gaps occur, the section shall be replaced or
the gap repaired by applying adhesive under the lap and then stapling.
e.
All Staples, including those used to repair factory self seal lap systems, shall be coated
with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket
less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape. All seams, except those on factory self seal sys
tems shall be coated with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than
3 ply laminate jacket less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
f.
Breaks and punctures in the jacket material shall be patched by wrapping a strip of jacket
material around the pipe and securing it with adhesive, stapling, and coating with vapor
retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket less than
0.0000 perm adhesive tape. The patch shall extend not less than 1 1/2 inches past the
break.
g.
Installation of flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be by slitting the tubular
sections and applying them onto the piping or tubing. Alternately, whenever possible
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 16
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
slide un slit sections over the open ends of piping or tubing. All seams and butt joints
shall be secured and sealed with adhesive. When using self seal products only the butt
joints shall be secured with adhesive. Insulation shall be pushed on the pipe, never
pulled. Stretching of insulation may result in open seams and joints. All edges shall be
clean cut. Rough or jagged edges of the insulation shall not be permitted. Proper tools
such as sharp knives shall be used. Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation when used on pipe
larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around the pipe. On pipes larger than 12
inches, adhere sheet insulation directly to the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe.
3.2.2.4 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories
a.
Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the fittings and accessories. The
butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant and sealed with a vapor retarder
coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket less than 0.0000
perm adhesive tape.
b.
Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed around all fittings and accessories. Insula
tion shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation, including same density, thickness,
and thermal conductivity. Where precut/preformed is unavailable, rigid preformed pipe
insulation sections may be segmented into the shape required. Insulation of the same
thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation shall be used. If nesting size
insulation is used, the insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter.
c.
Upon completion of insulation installation on flanges, unions, valves, anchors, fittings and
accessories, terminations, seams, joints and insulation not protected by factory vapor re
tarder jackets or PVC fitting covers shall be protected with PVDC or greater than 3 ply
laminate jacket less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or two coats of vapor retarder
coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch, applied with glass tape embedded
between coats. Tape seams shall overlap 1 inch. The coating shall extend out onto the
adjoining pipe insulation 2 inches. Fabricated insulation with a factory vapor retarder
jacket shall be protected with either greater than 3 ply laminate jacket less than 0.0000
perm adhesive tape, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or PVDC adhe
sive tape or two coats of vapor retarder coating with a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch
and with a 2 inch wide glass tape embedded between coats. Where fitting insulation
butts to pipe insulation, the joints shall be sealed with a vapor retarder coating and a 4
inch wide ASJ tape which matches the jacket of the pipe insulation.
d.
Anchors attached directly to the pipe shall be insulated for a sufficient distance to prevent
condensation but not less than 6 inches from the insulation surface.
e.
Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions, strainers, and check valves.
3.2.2.5 Optional PVC Fitting Covers
At the option of the Contractor, premolded, one or two piece PVC fitting covers may be used in lieu of
the vapor retarder and embedded glass tape. Factory precut or premolded insulation segments shall
be used under the fitting covers for elbows. Insulation segments shall be the same insulation as the
pipe insulation including same density, thickness, and thermal conductivity. The covers shall be se
cured by PVC vapor retarder tape, adhesive, seal welding or with tacks made for securing PVC covers.
Seams in the cover, and tacks and laps to adjoining pipe insulation jacket, shall be sealed with vapor
retarder tape to ensure that the assembly has a continuous vapor seal.
3.2.3 Aboveground Hot Pipelines
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 17
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
3.2.3.1 General Requirements
All hot pipe lines above 60 degrees F, except those piping listed in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in
PART 3 as to be omitted, shall be insulated in accordance with Table 2. This includes but is not limited
to the following:
a.
Domestic hot water supply: Insulation shall be covered, in accordance with manufactur
er's recommendations, with a factory applied Type I jacket or field applied aluminum
where required or seal welded PVC.
3.2.3.2 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories
a.
General. Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the fittings and acces
sories. The butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant. Insulation shall be
marked showing the location of unions, strainers, check valves and other components
that would otherwise be hidden from view by the insulation.
b.
Precut or Preformed. Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed around all fittings
and accessories. Insulation shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation, including
same density, thickness, and thermal conductivity.
3.2.4 Piping Exposed to Weather
Piping exposed to weather shall be insulated and jacketed as specified for the applicable service inside
the building. After this procedure, a laminated self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils em
bossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket less than 0.0000 permeability (greater than 3 ply, stan
dard grade, silver, white, black and embossed aluminum jacket or PVC jacket shall be applied. PVC
jacketing requires no factory applied jacket beneath it, however an all service jacket shall be applied if
factory applied jacketing is not furnished. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation exposed to weather
shall be treated in accordance with paragraph INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC
CELLULAR INSULATION in PART 3.
3.2.4.1 Aluminum Jacket
The jacket for hot piping may be factory applied. The jacket shall overlap not less than 2 inches at lon
gitudinal and circumferential joints and shall be secured with bands at not more than 12 inch centers.
Longitudinal joints shall be overlapped down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o'clock positions.
Joints on piping 60 degrees F and below shall be sealed with metal jacketing/flashing sealant while
overlapping to prevent moisture penetration. Where jacketing on piping 60 degrees F and below abuts
an un insulated surface, joints shall be caulked to prevent moisture penetration. Joints on piping above
60 degrees F shall be sealed with a moisture retarder.
3.2.4.2 Insulation for Fittings
Flanges, unions, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be insulated and finished as specified for the
applicable service. Two coats of breather emulsion type weatherproof mastic (impermeable to water,
permeable to air) recommended by the insulation manufacturer shall be applied with glass tape em
bedded between coats. Tape overlaps shall be not less than 1 inch and the adjoining aluminum jacket
not less than 2 inches. Factory preformed aluminum jackets may be used in lieu of the above. Molded
PVC fitting covers shall be provided when PVC jackets are used for straight runs of pipe. PVC fitting
covers shall have adhesive welded joints and shall be weatherproof laminated self adhesive (minimum
2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket less than 0.0000 permeabili
ty, (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed, and UV resistant.
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 18
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
3.2.4.3 PVC Jacket
PVC jacket shall be ultraviolet resistant and adhesive welded weather tight with manufacturer's rec
ommended adhesive. Installation shall include provision for thermal expansion.
3.3
DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
Install duct insulation systems in accordance with the manufacturer's published installation in
structions.
Except for oven hood exhaust duct insulation, corner angles shall be installed on external corners
of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacket.
Air condi
tioned spaces shall be defined as those spaces directly supplied with cooled conditioned air (or
provided with a cooling device such as a fan coil unit) and heated conditioned air.
3.3.1
Duct Insulation Thickness
Supply, return and outdoor air duct and plenum insulation shall be mineral fiber blanket, 2 inches
thich and 1.5 lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
3.3.2
Insulation and Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier for Cold Air Duct
Insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall be provided for the following cold air ducts and
associated equipment.
a.
Supply ducts.
b.
Return air ducts.
c.
Flexible run outs (field insulated).
d.
Plenums.
e.
Fresh air intake ducts.
Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed, minimum density 3/4 pcf,
and rigid type where exposed, minimum density 3 pcf. Insulation for both concealed or exposed
round/oval ducts shall be flexible type, minimum density 3/4 pcf or a semi rigid board, minimum
density 3 pcf, formed or fabricated to a tight fit, edges beveled and joints tightly butted and stag
gered. Insulation for all exposed ducts shall be provided with either a white, paint able, factory
applied Type I jacket or a field applied vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket coating finish as speci
fied, the total field applied dry film thickness shall be approximately 1/16 inch. Insulation on all
concealed duct shall be provided with a factory applied Type I or II vapor retarder/vapor barrier
jacket. Duct insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and prepared openings except fire
wall penetrations. Duct insulation terminating at fire dampers, shall be continuous over the dam
per collar and retaining angle of fire dampers, which are exposed to unconditioned air and which
may be prone to condensate formation. Duct insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall
cover the collar, neck, and any un insulated surfaces of diffusers, registers and grills. Vapor re
tarder/vapor barrier materials shall be applied to form a complete unbroken vapor seal over the
insulation. Sheet Metal Duct shall be sealed in accordance with Section 23 31 13, Metal Ducts.
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 19
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
3.3.2.1 Installation on Concealed Duct
3.3.3
a.
For rectangular, oval or round ducts, flexible insulation shall be attached by applying ad
hesive around the entire perimeter of the duct in 6 inch wide strips on 12 inch centers.
b.
For rectangular and oval ducts, 24 inches and larger insulation shall be additionally se
cured to bottom of ducts by the use of mechanical fasteners. Fasteners shall be spaced
on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from duct corners.
c.
For rectangular, oval and round ducts, mechanical fasteners shall be provided on sides of
duct risers for all duct sizes. Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more
than 16 inches from duct corners.
d.
Insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners (self stick pins) where used and
shall be pressed thoroughly into the adhesive. Care shall be taken to ensure vapor re
tarder/vapor barrier jacket joints overlap 2 inches. The insulation shall not be com
pressed to a thickness less than that specified. Insulation shall be carried over standing
seams and trapeze type duct hangers.
e.
Where mechanical fasteners are used, self locking washers shall be installed and the pin
trimmed and bent over.
f.
Jacket overlaps shall be secured with staples and tape as necessary to ensure a secure
seal. Staples, tape and seams shall be coated with a brush coat of vapor retarder coat
ing or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3
mils embossed) less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
g.
Breaks in the jacket material shall be covered with patches of the same material as the
vapor retarder jacket. The patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break
or penetration in all directions and shall be secured with tape and staples. Staples and
tape joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive
tape or greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less
than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
h.
At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper operating rods, voids
in the insulation shall be filled and the penetration sealed with a brush coat of vapor re
tarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhe
sive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
i.
Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and flashed with a reinforced
vapor retarder coating finish or tape with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.. The
coating shall overlap the adjoining insulation and un insulated surface 2 inches. Pin
puncture coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all directions.
j.
Where insulation standoff brackets occur, insulation shall be extended under the bracket
and the jacket terminated at the bracket.
Ducts Handling Air for Dual Purpose
For air handling ducts for dual purpose below and above 60 degrees F, ducts shall be insulated
as specified for cold air duct.
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 20
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
3.3.4 Duct Test Holes
After duct systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced, breaks in the insulation and jacket shall
be repaired in accordance with the applicable section of this specification for the type of duct insulation
to be repaired.
END OF SECTION 23 07 00
June 23, 2014
23 07 00 21
HVAC INSULATION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air conditioning applications.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.3
Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R 22:
1.
Suction Lines for Heat Pump Applications: 325 psig.
2.
Liquid Lines: 325 psig.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include
pressure drop based on manufacturer's test data.
Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube,
and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal
runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection
details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.
1.
Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and
design actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe
and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation
difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure
proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.
Field quality control test reports.
Operation and maintenance data.
B.
C.
D.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.5
Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."
Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."
PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
PART 2
2.1
Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping
interior and exterior are clean when installed.
PRODUCTS
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
June 23, 2014
Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.
Wrought Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
Wrought Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95 5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper
socket fittings on copper pipe.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
23 23 00 1
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.2
VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
June 23, 2014
Service Valves:
1.
Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.
2.
Core: Removable ball type check valve with stainless steel spring.
3.
Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4.
End Connections: Copper spring.
5.
Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
1.
Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.
2.
Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
3.
Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4.
End Connections: Threaded.
5.
Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by
location with 1/2 inch conduit adapter, and 115 V ac coil.
6.
Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.
7.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
8.
Manual operator.
Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and
labeled by an NRTL.
1.
Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O ring seal.
2.
Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3.
Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4.
End Connections: Threaded.
5.
Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.
6.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750.
1.
Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.
2.
Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3.
Packing and Gaskets: Non asbestos.
4.
Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.
5.
Suction Temperature: 40 deg F.
6.
Reverse flow option (for heat pump applications).
7.
End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.
8.
Working Pressure Rating: 450 psig.
Moisture/Liquid Indicators:
1.
Body: Forged brass.
2.
Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element
protected by filter screen.
3.
Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm.
4.
Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.
5.
End Connections: Socket or flare.
6.
Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
7.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
Replaceable Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.
1.
Body and Cover: Painted steel shell with ductile iron cover, stainless steel
screws, and neoprene gaskets.
2.
Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless steel support.
3.
Desiccant Media: Activated alumina or charcoal.
4.
Designed for reverse flow (for heat pump applications).
5.
End Connections: Socket.
6.
Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure
differential measurement.
7.
Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.
8.
Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
9.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
23 23 00 2
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
G.
H.
2.3
Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.
1.
Body and Cover: Painted steel shell.
2.
Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless steel support.
3.
Desiccant Media: Activated alumina or charcoal.
4.
Designed for reverse flow (for heat pump applications).
5.
End Connections: Socket.
6.
Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure
differential measurement.
7.
Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.
8.
Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
9.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
Liquid Accumulators: Comply with ARI 495.
1.
Body: Welded steel with corrosion resistant coating.
2.
End Connections: Socket or threaded.
3.
Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
4.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
REFRIGERANTS
A.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Atofina Chemicals, Inc.
2.
DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.
3.
Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants.
4.
INEOS Fluor Americas LLC.
ASHRAE 34, R 22: Monochlorodifluoromethane.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
3.2
Liquid Lines and Suction Lines for Heat Pump Applications: Copper, Type ACR,
annealed temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with brazed joints.
VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
June 23, 2014
Install service valves for gage taps if they are not an integral part of condensing unit.
Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve when recommended by the
equipment manufacturer. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.
1.
Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
2.
Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb
straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.
3.
If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect
suction line pressure at bulb location.
Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
Pipe safety relief valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.
Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion
valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.
Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve
when recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
23 23 00 3
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
3.3
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
3.4
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
3.5
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on
Shop Drawings.
Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment
rooms and service areas.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows,
and fittings.
Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves
and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access
doors or panels when valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind
finished surfaces.
Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.
Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to
mechanical injury.
Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1.
Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
2.
Liquid lines may be installed level.
When brazing, remove solenoid valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems,
seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply
heat near expansion valve bulb.
Install pipe sleeves at penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.
Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping."
Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or
between pipes for insulation installation.
Install sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full
thickness insulation.
Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls according to Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants" for materials and methods.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe
and Tube."
1.
Use Type BcuP, copper phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with
copper pipe.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
B.
C.
June 23, 2014
Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and
Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
Install the following pipe attachments:
1.
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs.
2.
Copper clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact
with copper pipe.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:
1.
NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
23 23 00 4
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
3.7
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
2.
Test refrigerant piping and specialties.
Isolate compressor, condenser,
evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the
test pressure.
3.
Test high and low pressure side piping of each system separately at not less
than the pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
a.
Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.
b.
System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout
duration of test.
c.
Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small
amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints.
d.
Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory
results are achieved.
SYSTEM CHARGING
A.
3.8
NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
NPS 1 1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 1 1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 2 1/2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
Charge system using the following procedures:
1.
Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.
2.
Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If
vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
3.
Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
4.
Charge system with a new filter dryer core in charging line.
ADJUSTING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.
Adjust high and low pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to
fluctuating suction pressure.
Adjust set point temperature of air conditioning controllers to the system design
temperature.
Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to
manufacturer's written instructions:
1.
Verify that compressor oil level is correct.
2.
Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
3.
Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
4.
Check open compressor motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and
bearings.
Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design
flow rates and pressures are established.
END OF SECTION 23 23 00
June 23, 2014
23 23 00 5
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
This Section includes metal, rectangular ducts and fittings for supply, return, outside, and
exhaust air distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2 to plus 10 inch wg.
See Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound control devices, duct
mounted access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts.
1.
Penetrations through fire rated and other partitions.
2.
Duct accessories, including access doors and panels.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
NFPA Compliance:
1.
NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2.
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
3.
NFPA 96, "Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial
Cooking Operations."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.3
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
to product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers specified.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless
otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653 and having
G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed
to view.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;
3/8 inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
SEALANT MATERIALS
A.
B.
June 23, 2014
Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass fiber reinforced fabric.
Tape Sealing System: Woven fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound
and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard,
durable, airtight seal.
23 31 13 1
METAL DUCTS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.4
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
B.
C.
2.5
Water Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light
when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.
Solvent Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One part, nonsag, solvent release curing,
polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
Flanged Joint Mastic: One part, acid curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying
with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.
1.
Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all thread rods
or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc chromate primer after
installation.
2.
Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel
rod diameters.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
Trapeze and Riser Supports: Galvanized steel shapes and plates complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M.
RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
June 23, 2014
Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible" and
complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie rod
applications, and joint types and intervals.
1.
Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and
rigidity class required for pressure class.
2.
Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible."
Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide on joints and components constructed using
manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and
joint reinforcement.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b.
Nexus Inc.
c.
Ward Industries, Inc.
Formed On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 1 4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
B.
Lockformer.
2.
Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2 inch wg pressure class.
3.
Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.
Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and
larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area
unless ducts are lined.
23 31 13 2
METAL DUCTS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.6
GREASE DUCT
A.
Furnish single wall, factory built, grease duct for use with Type I kitchen hoods, which
conforms to the requirements of NFPA 96. Products shall be ETL listed to UL 1978 and
CAN/ULC S662 for venting air and grease vapors from commercial cooking operations
as described in NFPA 96
B.
The duct wall shall be constructed of .036 and .047 thick stainless steel and be available
in diameters 8" through 24".
C.
All supports, fan adapters, hood connections, fittings and expansion joints required to
install grease duct shall be included.
D.
The grease duct will terminate at the fan adapter plate, will be fully welded to the fan
adapter plate and the fan adapter plate will be fastened to the curb using a suitably sized
fastener provided by others.
E.
Grease duct joints shall be held together by means of formed vee clamps and sealed with
3M Fire Barrier 2000+ or equal. Screws used to secure the vee clamps shall be of the
hex head type with flanged stops and tapered "lead in" threads for easy starting. Nuts
shall be retained by means of free floating cage to allow easy alignment.
F.
Single wall grease duct shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
"Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual", ETL listing and state and local codes.
G.
Support horizontally installed grease duct from the building structure using above
method. 1/2" threaded rod and saddles may also be used for the support of horizontal
grease duct.
H.
Fans shall be supported independently from the grease duct sections. Protect grease
duct from twisting or movement caused by fan torque or vibration.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
DUCT APPLICATIONS
A.
3.2
Static Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the
following:
1.
Supply Ducts: 1 inch wg.
2.
Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1 inch wg.
3.
Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1 inch wg.
DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
June 23, 2014
Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.
Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a
minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.
Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
23 31 13 3
METAL DUCTS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
3.3
SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A.
B.
3.4
Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.
1.
For pressure classes lower than 2 inch wg, seal transverse joints.
Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.
HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A.
B.
3.5
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid
partitions unless specifically indicated.
Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire and smoke control dampers, lighting
layouts, and similar finished work.
Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and
afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults
and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
Non Fire Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings
and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts.
Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1 1/2 inches.
Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed.
Follow SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."
Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each
branch intersection. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each
floor.
Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one fourth of
failure (proof test) load.
CONNECTIONS
A.
B.
Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 Section
"Air Duct Accessories."
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
END OF SECTION 23 31 13
June 23, 2014
23 31 13 4
METAL DUCTS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A,
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.3
This Section includes the following:
1.
Volume dampers.
2.
Turning vanes.
3.
Flexible connectors.
4.
Duct accessory hardware.
5.
Ceiling mounted exhaust fans.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Volume dampers.
2.
Turning vanes.
3.
Flexible connectors.
4.
Ceiling mounted exhaust fans.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
each field connection.
1.
Special fittings.
2.
Manual volume damper installations.
3.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
4.
Ceiling mounted exhaust fans.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
to product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers specified.
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
June 23, 2014
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless
otherwise indicated.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653 and having
G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed
to view.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless steel
ducts.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;
3/8 inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
23 33 00 1
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.3
VOLUME DAMPERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.4
TURNING VANES
A.
B.
2.5
Manufacturers:
1.
Air Balance, Inc.
2.
American Warming and Ventilating.
3.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
4.
McGill AirFlow Corporation.
5.
METALAIRE, Inc.
6.
Nailor Industries Inc.
7.
Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
8.
Ruskin Company.
9.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen
damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single blade dampers in a
fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal
duct consistent with pressure class.
Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple or single blade, parallel or opposed blade design
as indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for
horizontal or vertical applications.
1.
Steel Frames: Hat shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064
inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated
for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in
ducts.
2.
Roll Formed Steel Blades: 0.064 inch thick, galvanized sheet steel.
3.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
4.
Bearings: Oil impregnated bronze, molded synthetic or stainless steel sleeve.
5.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
Jackshaft: Galvanized steel pipe rotating within pipe bearing assembly mounted on
supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple damper assemblies.
1.
Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each
damper in multiple damper assembly.
Damper Hardware: Zinc plated, die cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32 inch
thick zinc plated steel, and a 3/4 inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit
damper operating rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and
Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.
Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1 1/2 inch wide, single vane, curved blades of
galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2
inches o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b.
Duro Dyne Corp.
c.
METALAIRE, Inc.
d.
Ward Industries, Inc.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
June 23, 2014
Manufacturers:
1.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2.
Duro Dyne Corp.
3.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
4.
Ward Industries, Inc.
23 33 00 2
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
B.
C.
2.6
DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A.
B.
27.
General Description:
Flame retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and
adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.
Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
2.
Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
3.
Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw
cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of
length to suit duct insulation thickness.
Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to
gasoline and grease.
CEILING MOUNTED EXHAUST FANS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Carnes Co.
2.
Cook (Loren) Co.
3.
Greenheck Fan Corp.
4.
ILG Industries, Inc.
B.
Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installation in ceiling or for concealed in line
applications.
C.
Housing: Galvanized steel lines with acoustical insulation.
D.
Grille: Louvered grilled with flange on intake and sheet metal screws attachment to fan
housing.
E.
Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheel directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor and
fan wheel shall be removable for service.
F.
Electrical Requirements:
Junction box for electrical connection on housing and
receptacle for motor plug in.
G.
Accessories: Standard backdraft damper.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
June 23, 2014
Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts.
Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized steel
accessories in galvanized steel and fibrous glass ducts, stainless steel accessories in
stainless steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indicated.
Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where
branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two
duct widths from branch takeoff.
Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
23 33 00 3
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
F.
G.
3.2
Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with
fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.
Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
ADJUSTING
A.
B.
Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
Final positioning of manual volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section "Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
END OF SECTION 23 33 00
June 23, 2014
23 33 00 4
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 23 37 13 REGISTERS AND GRILLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes ceiling, floor, and wall mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static pressure drop, and noise
ratings.
2.
Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room
location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2. 2
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
to product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers specified.
REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A.
Provide as scheduled on the drawings.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Anemostat; a Mestek Company.
b.
Carnes.
c.
Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Hart & Cooley Div.
d.
Krueger.
e.
METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc.
f.
Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.
g.
Price Industries.
h.
Titus.
i.
Tuttle & Bailey.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
June 23, 2014
Install diffusers and grilles level and plumb.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and
inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise
criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated,
as much as practicable. Where architectural features or other items conflict with
installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
Install diffusers and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers and air extractors.
23 37 13 1
REGISTERS AND GRILLES
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
3.2
ADJUSTING
A.
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as
directed, before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 23 37 13
June 23, 2014
23 37 13 2
REGISTERS AND GRILLES
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 23 81 26 SPLIT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
A.
Split system equipment shall be furnished and installed as scheduled on drawings and as
specified within this division.
B.
Bids shall include factory start up of equipment.
C.
This section shall include provisions for ductless split system air conditioning units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
GENERAL
A.
Equipment using refrigerants R 11, R 12, R 113, R 114, R 115, R 500, or refrigerants
with ozone depletion factor (ODF) greater than 0.05 shall not be permitted.
B.
Split system equipment: Provide factory assembled, designed, tested, and rated in
accordance with ARI 210/240 or ARI 340/360 for cooling. Provide separate assemblies
designed to be used together. Base ratings on the use of matched assemblies. Units
shall have a minimum SEER as specified on the drawings when tested in accordance with
ARI 210/240 or ARI 340/360 as applicable. Units shall be ARI certified or rated in ARI UD
for cooling. Outside unit shall include compressor and condenser. Provide guards to
protect condenser fins. Units shall be listed in UL EAUED or ETL DLP.
COILS
A.
2.3
2.4
Evaporator and condenser coils shall have copper or aluminum tubes with copper or
aluminum fins that are mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes. Casing shall be
galvanized steel or aluminum. Contact of dissimilar metals shall be avoided. Coils shall
be tested in accordance with ASHRAE 15 at the factory and be suitable for the working
pressure of the installed system. Each coil shall be dehydrated and sealed after testing
and prior to charging.
FILTER SECTION
A.
Ductless split systems shall be provided with a permanent electrostatic, washable, user
accessible filter.
B.
Ducted systems shall be provided with UL listed throw away one inch fiberglass filter,
standard dust holding capacity, 350 fpm maximum face velocity. Provide gasketed
hinged access panel with latch.
SAFETY CONTROLS
A.
June 23, 2014
Provide low refrigerant pressure protection and pressure relief device.
Provide
compressor motor with thermal and overload protection, 5 minute anti recycle timer and
starter capacitor kit. Provide compressor with electrical crankcase heater and internal
high pressure protection.
23 81 26 1
SPLIT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.5
SPACE TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
A.
2.6
2.7
FAN SECTION
A.
Air handling unit fan shall be a draw through fan section including motor, starter and
drives. Provide adjustable sheaves or fan speed controller to permit fan capacity
adjustment up to 5 percent above and below rated capacity.
B.
Ductless unit fan shall be backward curved impeller centrifugal design, dynamically and
statically balanced and mounted on integral mounting rails. Motor shall be multi speed,
enclosed type with thermal protection and sealed lifting bearings.
AIR COOLED UNITS:
A.
2.9
Provide electronic controls including adjustable programmable thermostats with COOL
OFF HEAT system switch and AUTO ON fan switch. Thermostats shall be provided by
unit manufacturer. Provide relays, transformers, contactors, and control wiring between
thermostats and unit.
Provide units factory assembled, designed, tested and rated in accordance with ARI
210/240 or ARI 340/360. Units shall be ARI certified. Provide units including electric
motor driven refrigerant compressors with integral crankcase heater, air cooled
condenser, with refrigerant and holding charge of dry nitrogen and seal. Provide isolation
and service valves at refrigerant piping connections to unit. Provide refrigerant, pressure
relief valve, solenoid valve, combination filter dryer, and expansion valves. Condenser
discharge air shall be in vertical direction. Provide guards to protect fins from mechanical
damage. Provide extension tubing to exterior of unit casing for each lubrication fitting.
Provide field adjustable head pressure controls to maintain a minimum head pressure
corresponding to 90 degrees F condensing temperature when ambient temperature is 40
degrees F. Crankcase heaters are not required when scroll compressors are provided.
Unit shall be manufactured by same manufacturer as the air handling unit. Heat pump
units shall be provided with refrigerant reversing valve and associated controls.
1.
Controls: Provide factory controls including automatic safety shutdown switches
for each compressor for the following hazardous system conditions: refrigerant
high pressure, refrigerant low pressure, low oil level and compressor overload.
The switches shall be located in the unit control panel. The cutout switches shall
automatically stop the respective compressors. Provide unit with low ambient
controls and compressor hard start.
2.
Weatherproof Casing: Provide removable gasketed panels designed to exclude
driving rain for access to fans, coils, filters, compressors, motors, and controls.
ELECTRICAL
A.
Electrical Motors, Controllers, Contactors, and Disconnects: Furnish with respective
pieces of equipment. Motors, controllers, contactors, and disconnects shall conform to
Division 16. Provide controllers and contactors with maximum of 120 volt control circuits,
and auxiliary contacts for use with controls furnished. When motors and equipment
furnished are larger than sizes indicated, the cost of providing additional electrical service
and related work shall be included under this section.
B.
Electrical Work: Provided under Division 16. Provide control wiring under this section in
accordance with NFPA 70.
June 23, 2014
23 81 26 2
SPLIT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
Equipment shall be of suitable dimension for the area in which it is to be installed. If the
equipment dimensions and/or arrangements differ materially from that shown on the drawings, the
Contractor shall be responsible for any redesign that is necessary at no additional cost to the
Owner.
3.2
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, equipment installation, duct connections,
supports, vibration isolation, suspension, piping and related arrangements shall be in accordance
with the Manufacturer's recommended installation for the service.
END OF SECTION 238126
June 23, 2014
23 81 26 3
SPLIT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Electrical equipment coordination and installation.
2.
Common electrical installation requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:
1.
To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that
reduce headroom are indicated.
2.
To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to
other installations.
3.
To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
4.
So connecting raceways and wireways will be clear of obstructions and of the
working and access space of other equipment.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast in place
concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
Coordinate connections of all kitchen equipment prior to rough in and for dimensional
layout requirements. All connections shall be installed flush with wall.
B.
C.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Comply with NECA 1.
Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center
of unit for wall mounting items.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom
consistent with these requirements.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such
a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in
the vicinity.
Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
END OF SECTION 26 05 00
June 23, 2014
26 05 00 1
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
ELECTRICAL
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Field quality control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS
A.
B.
2.2
CONNECTORS
A.
B.
C.
2.3
Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise
required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
Bare Copper Conductors:
1.
Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2.
Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3.
Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in
diameter.
4.
Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
5.
Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper
ferrules; 1 5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and
combinations of conductors and other items connected.
Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure
type, with at least two bolts.
1.
Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
Welded Connectors: Exothermic welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer
for materials being joined and installation conditions.
GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A.
June 23, 2014
Ground Rods: Copper clad steel, 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet long.
26 05 26 1
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATIONS
A.
B.
3.2
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A.
B.
3.3
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
Water Heater: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each
electric water heater. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and
components, where provided.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
3.4
Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors
for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1.
Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2.
Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except as otherwise indicated.
3.
Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless
otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors
where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade,
unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging
coating, if any.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and
maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1.
Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to
penetrate any adjacent parts.
2.
Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports:
Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3.
Use exothermic welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect type
connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
C.
Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have
been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2.
Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground
resistance level is specified. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors
are connected.
a.
Perform tests by fall of potential method according to IEEE 81.
Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System: 10 ohms.
Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify
Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26
June 23, 2014
26 05 26 2
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical
wiring.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
C.
June 23, 2014
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
Alflex Inc.
Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
Electri Flex Co.
Republic Conduit.
Western Tube & conduit Corp.
Wheatland Tube Company.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
IMC: ANSI C80.6.
26 05 33 1
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
D.
EMT: ANSI C80.3.
E.
FMC: Zinc coated steel.
F.
LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
G.
Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:
NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and
environment in which installed.
1. Fittings for EMT: Steel compression type.
a.
2.2
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.3
Connectors shall have insulated throat.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
CANTEX Inc.
CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.
Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
Queen City Plastics.
Southern Pipe.
B.
RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC 40 PVC, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
METAL WIREWAYS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Austin Co. (The).
Cooper B Line, Inc.
Hoffman.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
B.
Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless
otherwise indicated.
C.
Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,
hold down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as
required for complete system.
D.
Wireway Covers: Screw cover type.
E.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
June 23, 2014
26 05 33 2
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.4
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Austin Co. (The).
Cooper Crouse Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
EGS/Appleton Electric.
Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
Hoffman.
Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.
O Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.
RACO; a Hubbell Company.
Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.
Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division.
Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
B.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
C.
Cast Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed
cover.
D.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard
enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
RACEWAY APPLICATION
A.
Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit or IMC.
Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit, IMC, and EMT.
Underground Conduit: Type EPC PVC, direct buried.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor Driven Equipment): LFMC.
Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250.
Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2 inch trade size.:
June 23, 2014
26 05 33 3
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
D.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1.
E.
3.2
Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless
otherwise indicated.
Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in
Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
B.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water
pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D.
Arrange stub ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
E.
Install no more than the equivalent of three 90 degree bends in any conduit run except
for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.
F.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise
indicated.
G.
Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating
bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
H.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with
not less than 200 lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull
wire.
I.
Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for
recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise
transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
K.
3.3
Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry
block, and install box flush with surface of wall.
INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
.
A.
June 23, 2014
Direct Buried Conduit:
1.
Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit.
2.
Install backfill.
3.
After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie in point, and work
toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with
expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly
hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After
26 05 33 4
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit
connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction.
4.
3.4
Install manufactured duct elbows for stub ups at poles and equipment and at
building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows
for stub up ducts throughout the length of the elbow.
PROTECTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and
cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes
manufacturer.
with
zinc rich paint recommended by
.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33
June 23, 2014
26 05 33 5
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
GFCI: Ground fault circuit interrupter.
RMS: Root mean square.
SUBMITTALS
A,
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.5
This Section includes the following:
1.
Panelboards.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, accessory,
and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on
features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1.
Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a.
Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
b.
Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
c.
Short circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective
devices.
d.
Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.
Field quality control test reports including the following:
1.
Test procedures used.
2.
Test results that comply with requirements.
3.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that
comply with requirements.
Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
June 23, 2014
Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components,
and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
panelboards and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01
Section "Product Requirements."
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
26 24 16 1
PANELBOARDS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
D.
E.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Comply with NEMA PB 1.
Comply with NFPA 70.
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F.
2.
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other
construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other
types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance
requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
B.
Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344.
Enclosures: Flush mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1.
1.
Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps.
2.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion resistant treatment
or primer coat.
3.
Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal frame,
inside panelboard door.
C.
Phase and Ground Buses:
1.
Material: Aluminum or copper.
2.
Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch circuit equipment
ground conductors; bonded to box.
D.
Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material.
1.
Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
2.
Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
E.
Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with
main service disconnect switches.
F.
Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances
required for future installation of devices.
2.2
PANELBOARD SHORT CIRCUIT RATING
A.
2.3
Rated to interrupt symmetrical short circuit current available at terminals.
PANELBOARDS
A.
B.
June 23, 2014
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt on circuit breakers, replaceable without
disturbing adjacent units.
Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
26 24 16 2
PANELBOARDS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.4
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
B.
Molded Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault
currents.
1.
Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time current element for low level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
2.
Adjustable Instantaneous Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front
mounted, field adjustable trip setting.
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip
ratings, and number of poles.
1.
Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
materials.
2.
Application Listing:
Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air conditioning, and
refrigerating equipment.
3.
Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a
single unit.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
B.
3.3
Identify field installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components.
Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads. Obtain approval before installing.
Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not
acceptable.
CONNECTIONS
A.
B.
3.4
Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
Mount top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box.
Install overcurrent protective devices.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems."
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
June 23, 2014
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1.
Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded case circuit
breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2.
Correct malfunctioning units on site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
26 24 16 3
PANELBOARDS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
3.5
CLEANING
A.
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint
splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION 26 24 16
June 23, 2014
26 24 16 4
PANELBOARDS
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes the following:
1.
Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, specialty receptacles for kitchen
equipment, and associated device plates.
2.
Snap switches.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.4
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
GFCI: Ground fault circuit interrupter.
Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch circuit conductor.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Field quality control test reports.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers'
packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through
one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring
devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
Comply with NFPA 70.
B.
C.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
June 23, 2014
Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1.
Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
2.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device Kellems (Hubbell).
3.
Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
4.
Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
26 27 26 1
WIRING DEVICES
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.2
STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES
A.
2.3
GFCI RECEPTACLES
A.
B.
2.4
Convenience Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
configuration 5 20R, and UL 498.
General Description: Straight blade, feed through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted
when device is tripped.
Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
Cooper; XGF20.
b.
Hubbell; GFR5352.
c.
Leviton; 8898.
d.
Pass & Seymour; 2094.
SNAP SWITCHES
A.
B.
2.5
Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.
Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
Cooper; CS120 (single pole), CS220 (two pole), CS320 (three way),
CS420 (four way).
b.
Hubbell; CS120 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS320 (three way),
CS420 (four way).
c.
Leviton; CS120 2 (single pole), CS220 2 (two pole), CS320 2 (three
way), CS420 2 (four way).
d.
Pass & Seymour; CS20AC1 (single pole), CSB20AC2 (two pole),
CS20AC3 (three way), CS20AC4 (four way).
WALL PLATES
A.
B.
2.6
Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
1.
Plate Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2.
Material for Finished Spaces: 0.32 thick stainless steel with a satin finish.
3.
Material for Unfinished Spaces: 0.32 thick stainless steel with a satin finish.
Wet Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather
resistant, thermoplastic with lockable cover.
FINISHES
A.
Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.
1.
Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
June 23, 2014
Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless
otherwise noted. Install flush in wall.
Coordination with Other Trades:
1.
Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place
wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with
routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.
26 27 26 2
WIRING DEVICES
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
June 23, 2014
Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement,
concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway
system, conductors, and cables.
3.
Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross
a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4.
Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
Conductors:
1.
Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or
terminated on devices.
2.
Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the
purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded
wire.
3.
The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of
NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.
4.
Existing Conductors:
a.
Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b.
Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign
matter.
c.
Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large
enough.
Device Installation:
1.
Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that
show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were
complete.
2.
Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to
connect conductors.
3.
Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until
the last possible moment.
4.
Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in
length.
5.
When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding head screw terminals. Wrap
solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.
6.
Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the
manufacturer.
7.
When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15 or 20 A circuits,
splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8.
Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9.
When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to
hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal to metal contact.
Receptacle Orientation:
1.
Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally
mounted receptacles to the right.
Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra deep plates. Repair wall finishes and
remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough
wall opening.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches
under single, multigang wall plates.
Adjust locations of service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
26 27 26 3
WIRING DEVICES
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.3
Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
2.
Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital
readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1.
Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2.
Percent Voltage Drop under 15 A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not
acceptable.
3.
Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4.
GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5.
Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely
mounted.
6.
The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at
the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective
devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning
units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 26 27 26
June 23, 2014
26 27 26 4
WIRING DEVICES
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
SECTION 26 41 00 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
Section Includes:
1.
Air Terminal
2.
Connections
3.
Cable
REFERENCES
A.
Reference Standards: Standards referenced by this Section include, but are not limited
to, the following:
LPI 175
NFPA 780
UL 96
UL 96A
1.4
Standard of Practice for Lightning Protection Systems
Installation of Lightning Protection Systems
Lightning Protection Components
Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
1. Air Terminal
2. Certificates
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Materials and components complying in weight, size and composition with NFPA 780 and
UL 96 lightning protection material requirements for this type of structure.
B.
All materials shall be aluminum, copper, bronze or stainless steel to match existing.
Aluminum shall be used in locations where system components are mounted to
aluminum surfaces to avoid galvanic corrosion of dissimilar metals. All grounding
components shall be copper.
1. Class I materials shall be used.
June 23, 2014
26 41 00 1
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
2.2
AIR TERMINALS
Provide terminals in accordance with UL 96, except provide Class II for Class I and Class II
applications. Support air terminals more than 24 inches in length by suitable brace, with guides,
not less than one half the height of the terminal.
2.3
CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS
Provide connectors for splicing conductors that conform to UL 96, class as applicable.
Conductor connections can be made by clamps or welds (including exothermic). Provide style
and size connectors required for the installation.
2.4
CABLE
Provide copper conductors on nonmetallic stacks that do not weigh less than 319 pounds per
thousand feet, and provide cable such that the size of any strand in the cable is not less than
No. 15 AWG. Provide thickness of web or ribbon on stacks that is not less than No. 12 AWG.
Provide loop conductors that are comprised of copper conductors not smaller than No. 1/0
AWG.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
AIR TERMINAL
Air terminal design and support conforming to NFPA 780. Rigidly connect terminals to, and make
electrically continuous with, roof conductors by means of pressure connectors or crimped joints
of T shaped malleable metal. Provide pressure connector or crimped joint with a dowel or
threaded fitting to connect ground rod conductor with air terminal. Set air terminals on or at
equipment to maintain proper listing/certification of lightning protection system. Secure air
terminals against overturning either by attachment to the object to be protected or by means of a
substantial tripod or other braces which are permanently and rigidly attached to the building or
structure. Metal projections and metal parts of buildings such as metal objects that are at least
3/16 inch thick and that do not contain hazardous materials, need not be provided with air
terminals. However, bond these metal objects to a lightning conductor through a metal conductor
of the same unit weight per length as the main conductor. Where metal HVAC units and
ventilators are installed, mount air terminals thereon, where practical. Bond air terminals, erected
by necessity adjacent to a metal ventilator, to the ventilator near the top and bottom.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install the lightning protection system in accordance with approved submittal
drawings. All equipment and components shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike
manner.
B.
Coordination:
C.
June 23, 2014
1.
General: The Contractor shall coordinate the work of this Section with that of
other trades to ensure a correct, neat and unobtrusive installation.
2.
Roof Systems: No roof penetrations allowed.
Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96A and NFPA 780.
26 41 00 2
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Building 1100 Cafe
Bid Documents
3.3
3.4
D.
Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid sharp
bends and narrow loops.
E.
Cable Connections: Use approved exothermic welded connections for all conductor
splices and connections between conductors and other components, except those above
single ply membrane roofing.
CORROSION PROTECTION
A.
Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate
corrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from
junction of such material.
B.
Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions would cause deterioration or
corrosion of conductors.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
UL Inspection: Apply for Master Label inspection(s) by UL. Make revisions and obtain
re inspections at no additional cost to the Owner to obtain a UL Master Label for system.
END OF SECTION 26 41 00
June 23, 2014
26 41 00 3
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Building 1100
Bid Documents
SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
B.
C.
D.
Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.
Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1.
Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
2.
Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.
3.
Ballast.
4.
Energy efficiency data.
5.
Life, output, and energy efficiency data for lamps.
Field quality control test reports.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.6
BF: Ballast factor.
CRI: Color rendering index.
CU: Coefficient of utilization.
LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.
RCR: Room cavity ratio.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
This Section includes the following:
1.
Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
Comply with NFPA 70.
WARRANTY
A.
June 23, 2014
Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in
which manufacturer of battery powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or
replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: Five years from date of
Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated
warranty for the remaining nine years.
26 51 00 1
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Building 1100
Bid Documents
2.
B.
Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self Powered Exit Sign
Batteries: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall
apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.
Special Warranty for Ballasts:
Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.2
Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed
fixtures.
Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to
prevent warping and sagging.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally
during relamping and when secured in operating position.
Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise
indicated:
1.
White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2.
Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3.
Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:
1.
Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a.
Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness
is indicated.
b.
UV stabilized.
2.
Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A.
June 23, 2014
Description: Electronic programmed rapid start type, complying with ANSI C 82.11,
designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light
output unless step dimming control is indicated:
1.
Lamp end of life detection and shutdown circuit.
2.
Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
3.
Sound Rating: A.
4.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
5.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
6.
Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
7.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
8.
BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated.
9.
Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.
10.
Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations
on electromagnetic and radio frequency interference for nonconsumer
\equipment.
11.
Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum.
26 51 00 2
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Building 1100
Bid Documents
2.3
REQUIREMENTS FOR INDIVIDUAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
A.
Fixtures shall be as scheduled on Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
3.2
Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in
each fixture.
Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.
Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating
and interpreting results.
If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to
demonstrate compliance with standards.
END OF SECTION 26 51 00
June 23, 2014
26 51 00 3
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Building 1100
Bid Documents
SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
GENERAL
Work includes providing additional devices to an existing system.
1.3
WORK INCLUDED
A.
B.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.
The contractor shall furnish and install additional devices and connection for the existing fire
alarm system as specified herein.
2.
The components shall include but not be limited to all control and communication equipment,
power supply (including remote power supplies), signal initiating devices, audible and visual
alarm indicating appliances, conduit, wiring, fittings, and all other accessories necessary for a
complete and operable system.
LABELING
1.
C.
D.
All system equipment shall be labeled with the manufacturer's name and logotype to assure the
integrity of the complete system.
AGENCY APPROVALS
1.
All equipment shall be listed as power limited by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., approved by
Factory Mutual or as accepted by the authority having jurisdiction. The catalog numbers
specified are those of Notifier and are indicative of the quality and type of equipment to be
furnished.
2.
The fire alarm system in its entirety shall be in compliance with all applicable fire and electrical
codes and comply with the requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction over said
systems.
3.
Accessory components as required shall be catalogued by the manufacturer and U.L. listed to
operate with the manufacturer's control panel.
SPECIFIC U.L. PROVISIONS
1.
The system shall comply with the applicable provisions of the following U.L. Standards and
Classifications:
UL 864, Control Units Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UOJZ, Control Units, System
UOXX, Control Unit Accessories, System
E.
SPECIFIC NFPA STANDARDS
1.
The system shall comply with the applicable provisions of the following current National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) standards:
NFPA 71, Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Signaling Systems for Central Station Service
NFPA 72, Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Protective Signaling Systems
NFPA 72E, Automatic Fire Detectors
June 23, 2014
28 31 00 1
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Building 1100
Bid Documents
NFPA 90A, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
NFPA 101, Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures
1.4
SCOPE
A.
1.5
1.6
The existing fire detection system shall be modified in accordance to the project specifications and
drawings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 013000.
B.
Indicate system components, size of components, location and provide full schematic or wiring system
showing building and operation details.
C.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
D.
Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions and maintenance and repair data.
E.
Suppliers qualifications shall be submitted indicating years in business, service policies, warranty
definitions, factory training and a list of similar installations.
F.
Contractor qualifications shall be supplied indicating years in business and prior experience with
installations that include the type of equipment that is to be supplied.
G.
Battery standby calculations showing total standby power needed to meet the system requirements as
specified.
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
Local and State Codes
1.
1.7
The system shall comply with all local and state codes with no exceptions.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Submit a complete Operation and Maintenance Manual.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
COMPONENTS
A.
B.
June 23, 2014
ELECTRONIC SOUNDERS
1.
Electronic sounders shall operate on 24 VDC nominal.
2.
Electronic sounders shall be field programmable without the use of special tools, to
provide slow whoop, continuous, or interrupted tones with an output sound level of at
least 90 dBA measured at 10 feet from the device.
3.
Shall be flush mounted.
Strobe lights shall meet the requirements of the ADA, UL Standard 1971 and shall meet the
following criteria:
1.
The maximum pulse duration shall be 2/10 of one second.
2.
Strobe intensity shall meet the requirements of UL 1971.
3.
The flash rate shall meet the requirements of UL 1971.
28 31 00 2
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Building 1100
Bid Documents
4.
C.
Color shall be white.
AUDIBLE/VISUAL COMBINATION DEVICES
1.
Shall meet the applicable requirements of Section A listed above for audibility.
2.
Shall meet the requirements of Section B listed above for visibility.
3.
Color shall be white.
PART 3 INSTALLATION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLERS' RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
The installer shall coordinate the installation of the fire alarm equipment with the manufacturer or his
authorized distributor.
B.
All conductors and wiring shall be installed in conduit in accordance to the manufacturer's
recommendations. Covers of junction boxes serving the fire alarm system shall be painted red.
C.
It shall be the installer’s responsibility to coordinate with the supplier, regarding the correct wiring
procedures before installing any conduits or conductors.
D.
INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS
1.
System components shall be installed in accordance with the latest revisions of the appropriate
NFPA codes, the requirements contained herein, National Electrical Code, local and state
regulations, the requirements of the fire department and other applicable authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.
Wire shall be U.L. listed as fire alarm protection signaling circuit cable per National Electrical
Code, Articles 760. Bell wire or thermostat wire is not acceptable. Twisted shall be required for
all analog communication loops.
WARRANTY AND FINAL TEST
A.
June 23, 2014
GENERAL
1.
The contractor shall warranty all equipment and wiring free from inherent mechanical and
electrical defects for one year (365 days) from the date of final acceptance.
2.
Final Test: Before the installation shall be considered completed and acceptable by the
awarding authority, a test on the system shall be performed as follows:
a.
The contractor's representative, in the presence of representatives of the manufacturer,
of the owner, and the fire department shall operate every building fire alarm device to
ensure proper operation and correct annunciation at the control panel.
b.
At least one half of all tests shall be performed on battery standby power.
c.
Where application of heat would destroy any detector, it may be manually activated.
d.
The analog communication loops and the indicating appliance circuits shall be opened
in at least two (2) locations per circuit to check for the presence of correct supervisory
circuitry.
e.
When the testing has been completed to the satisfaction of the representative of the
owner, a notarized letter co signed by each attesting to the satisfactory completion of
said testing shall be forwarded to the owner and the fire department.
f.
The contractor shall leave the fire alarm system in proper working order, and, without
additional expense to the owner, shall replace any defective materials or equipment
28 31 00 3
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Building 1100
Bid Documents
provided by him under this contract within one year (365 days) from the date of final
acceptance by the awarding authority.
g.
3.3
Prior to final test and fire department must be notified in accordance with local
requirements.
AS BUILT DRAWINGS, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A.
AS BUILT DRAWINGS
1.
A complete set of reproducible "as built" drawings showing installed wiring, color coding, and
wire tag notations for exact locations of all installed equipment, specific interconnections
between all equipment, and internal wiring of the equipment shall be delivered to the owner upon
completion of system.
END OF SECTION 28 31 00
June 23, 2014
28 31 00 4
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM